You are on page 1of 297

INTRODUCTION AND TECHNICAL DATA

Philips Medical Systems

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
2
DigitalDiagnost
Workstation
SERVICE TOOLS
3
Level 1 Documentation

REPLACEMENTS 4

ADJUSTMENTS
5

REMOTE PRINT EV
6

UNIX BASICS
7

Image processing and control unit for DigitalDiagnost


systems.
DICOM
8

DICOM PRINT
9

PCR READER INTEGRATION 10

Reproduction in whole or part of this manual is prohibited without the


written consent of the copyright owner. Use of the information contained
herein, in any form and/or by any means whatsoever, is strictly reserved
for Philips and its licensees. Use of this manual by unauthorized persons
is strictly prohibited.
RELEASE BULLETIN
11
Printed in Hamburg, Germany

12
4512 984 30191 Vers. 00 1
Workstation DigitalDiagnost

Proprietary Notice:
This document and the information contained in it is proprietary and
confidential information of Philips Medical Systems ("Philips") and
may not be reproduced, copied in whole or in part, adapted,
modified, disclosed to others, or disseminated without the prior
written permission of the Philips Legal Department. Use of this
document and the information contained in it is strictly reserved for
current Philips personnel and Philips customers who have a current
and valid license from Philips for use by the customer’s designated
in-house service employee on equipment located at the customer’s
designated site. Use of this document by unauthorized persons is
strictly prohibited. Report violation of these requirements to the
Philips Legal Department. This document must be returned to Philips
when the user is no longer licensed and in any event upon Philips’
first written request.

Warranty Disclaimer Language:


Philips provides this DOCUMENT without warranty of any kind,
implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Limitations of Liability Language:


Philips has taken care to ensure the accuracy of this document.
However, Philips assumes no liability for errors or omissions and
reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any
products herein to improve reliability, function, or design. Philips may
make improvements or changes in the product(s) or program(s)
described in this document at any time.

2 CSIP Level 1 4512 984 30191 Vers. 00


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Workstation DigitalDiagnost

SERVICE MANUAL – Subsystem


712

DigitalDiagnost workstation Author: J. Röhling

File: didi_rel_1_5_x_ws_register_lopad_30191Vers00.doc

List of pages and drawings (LOPAD) Manual Order No: 4512 984 30191
released: 11/2006

1-4

1-1 ... 1-9 (06.0)

2-1 ... 2-39 (06.0)

3-1 ... 3-117 (06.0)

4-1 ... 4-17 (06.0)

5-1 ... 5-10 (06.0)

6-1 ... 6-9 (06.0)

7-1 ... 7-9 (06.0)

4512 983 11811 (06.0)

4512 983 11821 (06.0)

4512 983 11831 (06.0)

4512 983 11801 (06.0)

4512 984 30191 Vers. 00 CSIP Level 1 3


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Workstation DigitalDiagnost

4 CSIP Level 1 4512 984 30191 Vers. 00


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x INTRODUCTION AND TECHNICAL DATA

INTRODUCTION AND TECHNICAL DATA


Workstation SUN BLADE 2500 / SUN ULTRA 10

DigitalDiagnost
Release 1.5.x
preliminary 8.11.2006

Table of CONTENTS

1 Introduction................................................................................................................................3

2 Workstation ................................................................................................................................5
2.1 Compatibility ................................................................................................................................5
2.2 Hardware .....................................................................................................................................5
2.3 Software.......................................................................................................................................7
2.3.1 Service Tool (partly accessible by customer)..............................................................................7
2.3.2 Application Software ....................................................................................................................7
2.3.3 Multi language Support (system user interface & user manuals) ..............................................7
2.3.4 Remote Software (Menu) ............................................................................................................7

List of figures

Figure 1-1, System Overview (TH / VE/T VS) ..........................................................................................3


Figure 1-2, System Overview VM with TH-S (CAN)................................................................................4
Figure 2-1, Integration of the DigitalDiagnost (Release 1.5.x) into the Hospital Network Environment ..9

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 1-1


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost INTRODUCTION AND TECHNICAL DATA

Glossary of terms and definitions

APR Anatomically Programmed Radiography PPS (Modality) Performed Procedure Step: same as
BWLM Basic Worklist Management MPPSRADOSRIS system from Philips
CAN Controller Area Network RF Radiofluroscopy
CR Computed Radiography RGDV Registration Devices
DIDI DigitalDiagnost: the FSXD based bucky system RIS Radiological Information System
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine ROI Region Of Interest
EOL End of life SC Storage Commit
FSXD (Digital) Flat Static X-Ray Detector SCP Service Class Provider (DICOM server)
FDXD (Digital) Flat Dynamic X-Ray Detector SCU Service Class User (DICOM client)
GUI Graphical User Interface (DIDI) SOP Service Object Pair (DICOM)
HIPAA Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act SRS System Requirement Specification
IHE Integrated Halthcare Enterprise SW Software
IOD Information Object Definition (DICOM) TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
KV Kilo Voltage t.b.d. to be defined
MIP Medical Imaging Platform (Group PMS, Best) US Ultra Sound
MPPS Modality Performed Procedure Step UID Unique Identifier (DICOM)
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures USIT User Interface Terminal (PCR)
MTTR Mean Time To Repair VNC Virtuell Network Computing
NFS Network File System WLM (Basic) Work List Management: same as BWLM
PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect WS Workstation (DIDI)
PCR Philips Computed Radiography TA-M Height Adjustable Trolley
MSB Mini System Bus

2 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost workstation


© 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x INTRODUCTION AND TECHNICAL DATA

1 Introduction
The SUN workstation is the head of the system. It controls all system units and subsystem directly or via the
local controllers (Bucky Controller, Wall stand Controller(s), Optimus CPU etc.).

As the “Images Processing Unit” it is responsible for:


¾ Image acquisition
¾ Image transfer (Detector Æ Workstation)
¾ Image processing
¾ Image storage (internal & external)
¾ Image printing
¾ Pre-Viewing (non diagnostic)
¾ Patient list handling
¾ RIS/PACS connection
¾ Worklist Management (BWLM)
¾ MPPS & Storage Commit handling
¾ Dicom Print (≥1.4.2)
¾ Image Stitching

The connections are realized via FOL (fibre optic link) , RS485/RS232 , CAN interfaces (links) and in case of
external connections : 10/100 Mbit/sec. Ethernet.
A so-called Mini System Bus (MSB) has been introduced to communicate with/within the VM/VS wall stand.

Integration of the SUN workstation into the DigitalDiagnost system:

Figure 1-1, System Overview (TH / VE/T VS)

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 1-3


Sec_1_Introduction1_5_x.doc © 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
INTRODUCTION AND TECHNICAL DATA DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Figure 1-2, System Overview VM with TH-S (CAN)

Possible system combinations:

¾ DigitalDiagnost TH (BUF) only table


¾ DigitalDiagnost TH (BUF) with VS or VM
¾ DigitalDiagnost VR/S with CS 2 / 4 or with FS (Tube floor stand, optional)
¾ DigitalDiagnost VM / VM2 with TH-S or TF-M / TA-M (trolley)
¾ DigitalDiagnost VM Compact (fixed, no horizontal movement)
¾ Second CS / Tube (only with TH (BUF) and VS)
¾ TA-M with DigitalDiagnost VM / VM compact / VR

Explanations:

TH-S Single Sided Table


TF-M Single Sided Trolley
TA-M Single Sided Trolley Height adj.
TH Table Height adjustable
FS Floor Stand (Tube Floor Stand)
CS Ceiling Suspension
VM Vertical Multipurpose
VS Vertical Stand
BUF Bucky Unit Family (New Bucky Unit)

1-4 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x INTRODUCTION AND TECHNICAL DATA

2 Workstation

2.1 Compatibility

RELEASE 1.5 CAN BE INSTALLED ON:

SUN Ultra 10:


¾ 1GB Memory
¾ Hard disk with minimum of 9 GB
¾ Auto stitching cannot be installed
¾ Not recommended for DICOM print

SUN Blade 2500 (red & silver)


¾ Requires 2GB memory
¾ OBP 4.17.1 (delivered on cdrom)

NOTE:
All systems with SUB Blade should be upgraded to Open Boot Version 4.17.1 or higher.
With release 1.5 a special OBP flash (4.17.1) cdrom is delivered. This flash process runs on 1.3.x / 1.4.x /
1.5.x.

2.2 Hardware
Since Release 1.4, a Sun Blade 2500 RED was introduced
Since June 2006 we changed to a SUN Blade 2500 SILVER.

SUN Ultra 10 is still supported and can be upgraded to 1.5.x . With Release 1.5 it is recommended to
upgrade the U10 to a SUN Blade Workstation due to performance restrictions.
DICOM Print requires an upgrade to SUN Blade 2500.

More details can be found in our Planning Reference Data.


The PRD is accessible in the INTRANET-INCENTER
(712 : Direct Radiography Æ Planning Data Æ DigitalDiagnost Workstation)

SUN Blade 2500 (SILVER) is delivered with:

¾ Solaris 8
¾ 4 x 512 MB (= 2GB) memory / DIMM
¾ 1 x 146 GB Hard disk or higher (ultra SCSI)
¾ 1x 1.6GHz UltraSPARC[tm] IIIi
¾ 3 x 33 MHZ PCI slots (used for FOL / CAN / HCU)
¾ 3 x 66 MHZ PCI (slots not used for DiDi)
¾ 1x Graphic Card / Accelerator (XVR 100)
¾ 2 serial ports
¾ One 10/100/1000BASE-T port
¾ USB 1.1: 4 ports (back)
¾ PCI slots :
Three 64 bit 33/66 MHz 3.3V, full length
Three 64 bit 33 MHz 5V, full length
¾ Type 6 (7) keyboard & Mouse (USB)
¾ CD/DVD Writer
¾ Smart Card Reader (not used )

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 1-5


Sec_1_Introduction1_5_x.doc © 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
INTRODUCTION AND TECHNICAL DATA DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x

SUN Blade 2500 (RED) (old deliveries)

¾ Solaris 8 (5.8)
¾ 2 x 512 MB (= 1GB) memory / DIMM
¾ 1 x 73 GB Hard disk or higher (ultra SCSI)
¾ 1 x 1,28 GHZ CPU
¾ 3 x 33 MHZ PCI slots (used for FOL / CAN / HCU)
¾ 3 x 66 MHZ PCI (slots not used for DiDi)
¾ 1x Graphic Card / Accelerator (XVR 100)
¾ 2 serial ports
¾ 10/100 Mbit/sec Ethernet
¾ Smart Card Reader (not used )

Standard SUN Ultra 10 (old deliveries)


¾ SUN Ultra 10 workstation
¾ 440 MHZ CPU
¾ 1 GB internal RAM
¾ min. 36 GB Harddisk SCSI
¾ 10/100 Mbit/sec Ethernet
¾ CD-ROM drive
¾ 1.44 Mbytes Floppy Drive (not supported by 1.3.1 or higher)
¾ For 1.4: 3D Creator Graphics Card + VGA Adapter required

Additional hardware extension by PMS (U10 & Blade 2500):


¾ PCI FOL Interface (Detector connection)
¾ PCI CAN Interface (System connection)
¾ PCI HCU Interface (optional, only in combination with Local Print option.
Not supported by Releases ≥ 1.4.x)
¾ PCI SCSI Interface for DOR drive (only U10 / Not required in Sun Blade 2500)
¾ Pioneer DOR Drive (DE-UH 710, only for U10)
¾ Advanced Print (delivered with EasyVision RAD & SwitchBox)

Monitor (s):
¾ 19 “ TFT Monitor
¾ 21 “ Color Monitor

Keyboard types / Country Kits:


The keyboard is part of the country kit. Refer to the commercial catalogue for details.

General note:
Type5 keyboard (not USB) : Ultra 10
Type6 & 7 USB keyboard : SUN Blade 2500 RED & SILVER

Type7 keyboard require 4.17.1 OBP or higher.

1-6 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x INTRODUCTION AND TECHNICAL DATA

2.3 Software

2.3.1 Service Tool (partly accessible by customer)

¾ Diagnostic software
¾ Image quality software (Acceptance)
¾ Error identification / LOG files
¾ Backup/Restore
¾ Customisation and configuration (set-up)
¾ Image Processing / Anatomical database
¾ Detector control / diagnostic / calibration
¾ Ethereal (for network diagnostics)
¾ Reject analysis
¾ Security / Access control
¾ User administration
¾ USB stick support

2.3.2 Application Software

¾ Patient management/handling (RIS/BWLM etc.)


¾ Image handling (storage/transfer/printing)
¾ Anatomical Database
¾ Acquisition control
¾ Examination control
¾ Detector control / diagnostic / calibration (Quality Assurance)

Options (1.5.x):

¾ DICOM store (no license)


¾ DICOM print (license)
¾ MPPS (license)
¾ BWLM (license)
¾ Storage Commit (no license)
¾ DICOM Greyscale Export Filter (license)
¾ Stitching (no license, only in combination with EV-RAD
and ortho package)
¾ Auto Stitching (license & auto stitching ruler Æ Blade 2500 2GB)
¾ QualityAssurance (RejectAnalysis) (license)
¾ DICOM Media/Local Storage (license, 24h free for service)
U10 Local Storage on DOR
Blade 2500 Local Storage on CDR (DICOM Media support)

2.3.3 Multi language Support (system user interface & user manuals)

Refer to the commercial catalogue for the current language status.

2.3.4 Remote Software (Menu)

Remote access is possible via standard terminal emulation (VT100) or TCP/IP combined with a PPP
connection.
In case of PPP a number of local Service Tools is available remotely using VNC.
The TCP/IP protocol is usable via network/router or Internet access or via modem.

Functionality:
¾ Access/transfer of log files and images
¾ Access/transfer to system configuration
¾ Access to UNIX shell
¾ Access to IQ Result Tool
¾ VNC (Restricted access to Service Tool)

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 1-7


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
INTRODUCTION AND TECHNICAL DATA DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

¾ RSN (Remote Service Network)

Security aspects for Remote Service:

The remote access to DigitalDiagnost is only possible via SSH (Secure Shell) applications. The protocol is
still TCP/IP (FTP) in combination with a SSH client on the remote station. Instead of TELNET it is
recommended to use PuTTY.
Classic TELNET will not work with 1.5.x The FTP client has to be substituted by WINSCP 2 (or higher).
Both tools are freeware even for commercial use. They can be installed on the service PCs without
administration rights.
Remote access to the Service Tool is made by VNC (Virtual Network Computing).
The remote-tools are available on the Zeppelin Tool CDROM or can be downloaded from the Internet.

Details in the Internet:

PuTTY : http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html
WINSCP : http://winscp.vse.cz
VNC : http://www.realvnc.com/download.html

The DigitalDiagnost system can also be accessed via RSN (TELNET SSH / FTP SSH and VNC).

Connectivity

Standard:
¾ DigitalDiagnost System (CAN: Optimus, Bucky Controller, Detector etc.)
¾ Network (10/100/1000 Mbit/sec Ethernet) Æ PACS/RIS/EasyVision
¾ Local PC-Workstation via network
¾ RSN (Remote Service Network). No modem support with 1.5 ! .

Optional:
¾ DICOM Print
¾ PCR Integration
¾ Barcode Reader HHP IT3800 USB (generally supported, but not for integrated PCR)
¾ Automatic Stitching

NOTE for Printing:

Advanced Print:
Supported with 1.4.1 & 1.5.x but no delivery with new systems.
Local Print:
Not supported anymore with 1.4.x or higher

1-8 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x INTRODUCTION AND TECHNICAL DATA

D
I
G
I
T
A
L
D I A G N O S T

IDC IDC

Figure 2-1, Integration of the DigitalDiagnost (Release 1.5.x) into the Hospital Network Environment

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 1-9


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
& CUSTOMIZATION
DigitalDiagnost
Release 1.5.x
13.11.2006

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 Conventions used in the Text ..................................................................................................3

2 Introduction................................................................................................................................4
2.1 Manual history ............................................................................................................................ 4
2.2 Compatibility ............................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 General ....................................................................................................................................... 4
2.3.1 Backups / Customization .............................................................................................................4
2.3.2 Open Boot Prom version 4.17.1 ..................................................................................................5

3 Software Installation..................................................................................................................6
3.1 Complete software installation.................................................................................................... 8
3.1.1 CD1: Solaris (Operating System) ................................................................................................8
3.1.2 CD2: Application Package...........................................................................................................9
3.1.3 CD3: Language Installation .......................................................................................................10
3.2 Re-Installation of the Application Package ............................................................................... 12
3.3 Installation of an Extension Level ............................................................................................. 15

4 Installation Manager ................................................................................................................15


4.1 Starting the Installation Manager.............................................................................................. 15
4.2 Features of the Installation Manager ........................................................................................ 16

5 Restore / Save Customer Specific Data and Settings..........................................................18


5.1 Backup...................................................................................................................................... 18
5.2 Restore ..................................................................................................................................... 19
5.3 Set Master Recovery Point....................................................................................................... 20
5.4 Customization Manager (CM)................................................................................................... 21

6 Shut-down Sequences ............................................................................................................34

7 Transfer the U10 (1.5.x) Backup to SUN Blade 2500 (1.5.x) ................................................36
7.1 Required hardware ................................................................................................................... 36
7.2 Preparation ............................................................................................................................... 36
7.3 BACKUP-Transfer (U10 Blade) ........................................................................................... 37
7.3.1 Known problem when transferring the Backup..........................................................................38
7.4 Nice to know commands........................................................................................................... 38
7.4.1 Alias to reach the TRANSFER directory....................................................................................38
7.4.2 Software crash. Emergency menu. ...........................................................................................38
7.4.3 Shutdown & re-start the system by this key-commands in emergency cases: .........................39
7.4.4 U10: Restore a Backup from CDROM.......................................................................................39
7.4.5 Screenshot stored as jpg to TRANSFER directory ...................................................................39

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-1


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1, Software Installation (Solaris & Application) ........................................................................11
Figure 3-2, Software Installation (Application)........................................................................................14
Figure 5-1, Customization Manager .......................................................................................................21
Figure 5-2, Basic screen.........................................................................................................................22
Figure 5-3, System screen .....................................................................................................................24
Figure 5-4, DICOM screen .....................................................................................................................25
Figure 5-5, RIS screen ...........................................................................................................................26
Figure 5-6, MISC screen ........................................................................................................................28
Figure 5-7, NET screen (DHCP active) ..................................................................................................30
Figure 5-8, DICOM & PRINT screen ......................................................................................................31
Figure 5-9, ARCHIVER screen...............................................................................................................32
Figure 5-10, PCR screen........................................................................................................................33
Figure 6-1, Shutdown/Re-Start Procedures ...........................................................................................35

2-2 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION

1 Conventions used in the Text

The conventions used for the display of text in this Manual are as described below:
• Input required :

• Warning and Caution indication :

• Notes :
• Time delay :
This indicates that a time delay is expected. No input is required for some time and is
followed by the approximate delay time (shown in bold, e.g. 15 minutes )

• Space : 9
• Passwords are confidential and are not published in this text.
If they are unknown please contact Philips Medical Systems, Hamburg, Germany.
• Shortcuts (where only a single key requires to be pressed) are as follows :

y = Yes q = Quit

n = No ?? = repeats the input screen

? = Help

If a (default = ....) value is shown a simple <Return> will accept that value.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-3


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2 Introduction

2.1 Manual history

Date Version Name Reason of changes


13.11.2006 1.0 Jörg Röhling NEW

2.2 Compatibility

RELEASE 1.5 CAN BE INSTALLED ON:

SUN Ultra 10:


1GB Memory
Hard disk with minimum of 9 GB
Auto stitching cannot be installed
Not recommended for DICOM print

SUN Blade 2500 (red & silver)


Requires 2GB memory

All systems with SUB Blade should be upgraded to Open Boot Version 4.17.1 or higher.
With 1.5 a special OBP flash (4.17.1) cdrom is delivered. This process runs on 1.3.x / 1.4.x / 1.5.x.

2.3 General
If the system is delivered the application software is already installed on the workstation. Some specific set-
ups must be performed using the Configuration Tool.

NOTE

If a U10 needs to be upgraded to 1.5.x it is required to install first the


“Creator Graphics Card”. 1.5 does not work with the on-board graphics card !

The software/licenses are delivered on 4 (+1) CDROMS:

• CD1 contains the operating software (Solaris 8) and is bootable.


• CD2 contains the DigitalDiagnost Application Package.
• CD3 language & APR CDROM.
• CD4 license/customization CDROM.
• CDx Extension Level CDROM with OBP 4.17.1 ( 4512 133 45731)

2.3.1 Backups / Customization

The factory customization files are part of CD4.

NOTE

Backups from Release 1.3/1.3.1 cannot be restored with Release 1.5.x

Release 1.3.x/1.4.x Licenses are not valid for Release 1.5.x !


1.4.1 Backups can be re-stored with some restrictions even if created on another workstation.

2-4 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION

The customization CDROM (4) contains the following information:

• Software Licenses
• Purchased Options
• System combinations
• Printing
• RGDVs combinations
• Language
• Customer Name
• Order (SAP-) Number
• System Serial Number

When a system is delivered initially the software is installed completely including all purchased options and
customer specific set-ups.

2.3.2 Open Boot Prom version 4.17.1

In case of an upgrade it is required to also upgrade the existing SUN Blade 2500 (red & silver) to OBP
4.17.1.

Check the OBP version:


During the boot process the OBP version is shown on the screen. If it is less than 4.17.1 it needs to be
upgraded. If a higher version is already installed – do not re-flash it.

The OBP upgrade process requires an installed DIDI release (1.3.x/1.4.x/1.5.x)

Problems solved:
- Memory compatibility
- Type7 keyboards compatibility

Flash procedure:
This cdrom needs to be installed as an Extension Level (refer to separate section for details)

1. Insert cdrom
2. Enter the Installation Manager
3. Select: "(8) Add Install Extension Level"

3-5 minutes

Within some minutes the OBP is flashed and the system is restarting.
During restart the OBP version is displayed. It is now 4.17.1

Note:
This Extension Level is not installed within the Application SW.
It performs the flash process and then disappears.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-5


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

3 Software Installation
The Software Installation process has three sections:

1. Solaris (UNIX), INGRES etc. CD1 (bootable)


2. Application Packages CD2
3. Language Management/Installation manager CD3
4. Customization Manager / Licenses CD4
5. OBP Extension Level 4.17.1 CD5

NOTE

The license strings are unique for every workstation and cannot be used on other equipment.
Exchange of the NVRAM or the workstation: A new License Paper/customization CDROM must be ordered.

Preparation:

CAUTION

Before installing new software on an existing system, perform a DB backup (this is to save all data
concerning local settings of network, printing, DICOM, RIS, site information, etc.)

Make sure the following local customer information / items are available.

• System Serial Number *


• Licenses (part of the License Paper) *
• U10 : Backup DOR
Blade 2500 : Backup CD-R
• Networkdata (IP, Network mask , DHCP , Time server etc...) **
• Time Zones of the Installation *
• Acquisition Number *
• DICOM settings (Network: DICOM Print/ DICOM Store/BWLM / MPPS)
• RIS settings *
• PCR integration *
• Customer Name *
• Department Name *
• Print option. If Remote Print: IP and AET of the Easy Vision *
• Delivered Options *

(* = its part of your BACKUP **= Will not be restored on another workstation )

Usually there is no need to note down these information, however it could be helpful to do so.

The BACKUP on CDROM will keep all relevant data.

2-6 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION

• Re-Install the complete SW package while the Application Software is already installed

1. Perform a Backup (Service Tool)

2. Stop the application sw:

System Logout Shutdown Power OFF Power ON

Wait ~10 seconds


Press Stop & a
<ok>

3. Re-boot from CDROM 1 and start the installation process:

<ok> boot9cdrom9-9install

Proceed as displayed on the monitor.

• Re-Install ONLY the Application Software

Use the Installation Manager Refer to Chapter: 3.2

• Installation after a software-crash

1. Stop the application sw (if still possible)

System Logout Shutdown Power OFF Power ON

While restarting: Shortly after the first lines are displayed…

Press Stop & a

<ok>

2. Re-boot from CDROM 1:

<ok> boot9cdrom9-9install

Proceed as displayed on the monitor

In critical cases it could be required press Stop & a at any time, or to disconnect power.

• Initial Installation (e.g. new hard disk / new workstation )

Refer to chapter: 3.1

• Installation of an Extension Level

This process will be performed mainly automatically via the Installation Manager.
Refer to the separate section “Installation of an Extension Level”.

NOTE

In case of an update from to 1.5.x please note down the Custom Manager settings !!!
This is for safety only !! The settings are temporarily stored on the disk and are restored into the database
automatically.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-7


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

3.1 Complete software installation

3.1.1 CD1: Solaris (Operating System)

Insert CD1 into the CDROM drive


(Only U10: Also insert a DOR into the DOR drive!! Any DOR can be used (even if not formatted). No
data on DOR will be destroyed.)

If the Application is still running:

1. Perform a Backup (Service Tool)

2. Stop the Application:

System Logout Shutdown Power OFF Power ON

While booting: Shortly after the first lines are displayed…

Press: Stop &a


From the <OK> prompt

<OK>

boot9cdrom9-9install <Return>

The Solaris installation will start now. This will take about 20 Minutes.

After CD1 software is installed completely the system gives the following message:

Please insert the DiDi Application CDROM (CD2) into the drive
Press “Return” to continue

2-8 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION

3.1.2 CD2: Application Package

Insert the application CDROM (CD2) when asked to do so.

This will install the complete application package. This will take about 10 Minutes.

After the Application Package is successfully installed the Customization Manager is started on a
graphical user interface (GUI). Perform the customization and/or restore the delivered CM CDROM .

Click on SAVE & EXIT when the customization is completed.

This brings you back to the Installation Manager :

NOTE:

this menu could look different dependent on the pre-conditions

1) Re-Installation of the Application Package


2) Start Customization Manager
3) Configure Network Driver
4) Start SUNvts (Hardware Analysis)
5) Review installation logs
6) Review Freeware Software Licences
7) Upgrade Reader Software
8) Quit

? 8 <Return>
The installation and the customization of the complete Software (Solaris & Application Package) is now
completed ! The language is now “English”. If another language is required follow the next instructions
(Language Installation).

If the required language is NOT “English”: Proceed with “Language Installation”


The item “Language Installation” is initially not shown and requires a re-start (auto).

Total time for software installation of CD1 & CD2 incl. Customization Manager : ~ 30 Minutes.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-9


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

3.1.3 CD3: Language Installation

To install the correct language a separate language CDROM (CD3) is delivered with the system.
This item automatically installs the selected language. Insert the language CDROM into the cdrom
drive. Select the required language package from the list.
If “English” is your language this step can be skipped! The application is basically installed in
English. There is no separate language package available for English.
Make sure to install the corresponding APR data sets on the generator later !

This will take about 2-3 Minutes.

Insert the Language CDROM (CD3) into the drive !

1) Re-Installation of the Application Package


2) Start Customization Manager
3) Configure Network Driver
4) Start SUNvts (Hardware Analysis)
5) Review installation logs
6) Review Freeware Software Licences
7) Language Management Only present with
8) Add Extension Level COMPANO Reader
9) Upgrade Reader Software
10) Quit

? 7 <Return>
Select the required language package from the list.

Wait until the language package was installed successfully.

? 10 <Return>

This will Quit & re-start the application software to the LOGIN Screen !

NOTE

During the initial start of the DigitalDiagnost Application some processes cannot work correctly until the
required nodes for DICOM/RIS/Printing are entered.
Some error messages will appear. Some processes may stop.

When the installation is completed the system starts the Customization Manager. If required, perform the
customer specific modifications.
For an initial SW installation it is required to restore the basic license CDROM (CD4) to activate the SW and
the delivered optional SW keys.

2-10 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION

Figure 3-1, Software Installation (Solaris & Application)

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-11


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

3.2 Re-Installation of the Application Package


Logout the application software:

System Logout Login: install & password

Insert the CD2 into the CDROM-drive.

The LOGIN Screen appears:

User install

Password ************

OK Emergency Password Restart Shutdown

INSTALLATION MANAGER

1) Re-Installation of the Application Package


This item is not present initially
during SW installation. Only 2) Start Customization Manager
present after re-start. 3) Configure Network Driver
4) Start SUNvts (Hardware Analysis)
5) Review installation logs
6) Review Freeware Software Licences
7) Language Management
8) Add Extension Level
9) Upgrade Reader Software
Only present with
10) Quit COMPANO Reader

? 1 <Return>

This will remove the (old) application package AND will install the new package from the inserted CDROM.
If no CDROM is inserted a reminder message will appear.

The installation will start now. This will take about 3-5 Minutes.

Are you sure you want to delete the application software (default: no)
[y,n,?]

? Y <Return>

2-12 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION

After the Application Package is successfully installed the Customization Manager is started on a
Graphical User Interface (GUI). If modifications are required ---do so.

EXIT the CM brings you back to the Installation Manager:

1) Re-Installation of the Application Package


2) Start Customization Manager
3) Configure Network Driver
4) Start SUNvts (Hardware Analysis)
5) Review installation logs
6) Review Freeware Software Licences Only present with
7) Language Management COMPANO Reader
8) Add Extension Level
9) Upgrade Reader Software
10) Quit

Choose “Quit“ if “English” is your required language and skip the Language Package
Installation.

Proceed with Language Package Installation if you want to install another language.

Language Package Installation

To install the correct language a separate language CDROM (CD3) is delivered with the system.
This item automatically installs the selected language. Insert the language CDROM into the cdrom
drive and select this item. Select the required language package from the list.

This will take about 5 Minutes.

1) Re-Installation of the Application Package


2) Start Customization Manager
3) Configure Network Driver
4) Start SUNvts (Hardware Analysis)
5) Review installation logs
6) Review Freeware Software Licences Only present with
7) Language Management COMPANO Reader
8) Add Extension Level
9) Upgrade Reader Software
10) Quit

7 <Return>
This installs the required language package from CD3.

10 (9) <Return>
This will Quit & re-start the application software to the Login Screen !

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-13


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Figure 3-2, Software Installation (Application)

2-14 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION

3.3 Installation of an Extension Level


Insert the CDROM (with the required Extension Level package)

1) Re-Installation of the Application Package


2) Start Customization Manager
3) Configure Network Driver
4) Start SUNvts (Hardware Analysis)
5) Review installation logs
6) Review Freeware Software Licences
7) Language Management
8) Add Extension Level
9) Upgrade Reader Software
10) Quit

? 8 <Return>
Wait until the Extension Level is installed successfully !

10 (9) <Return>
This will re-start the application software to the Login Screen !

4 Installation Manager

4.1 Starting the Installation Manager


Logout the application software from the Status Bar:

SYSTEM LOGOUT

User install

Password ************

OK Emergency Password Restart Shutdown

Installation Manager :

1) Re-Installation of the Application Package


2) Start Customization Manager
3) Configure Network Driver
Language Management: 4) Start SUNvts (Hardware Analysis)
Is not present initially during 5) Review installation logs
SW installation.
6) Review Freeware Software Licences
Only present after re-start.
7) Language Management
8) Add Extension Level Only present with
9) Upgrade Reader Software COMPANO Reader
10) Quit

? <Return>

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-15


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.2 Features of the Installation Manager

Re-Installation of the Application Package (CD2)


This removes and re-install the application package.

Start Customization Manager


This starts the Customization Manager on a graphical surface. For details refer to the separate
section “Customization Manager”.

Configure Network Driver


Select the correct setting according to the connected network.
The standard/default setting is “auto” and is usually correct. If another setting is required select one
of the other possibilities.

hme network configuration


*************************
1 Auto AutoNegotiation
2 10HD 10 MPS, half-duplex
3 10FD 10 Mbps, full-duplex
4 100HD 100 Mbps, half-duplex
5 100FD 100 Mbps, full-duplex
6 1000HD 1000 Mbps, half-duplex
7 1000FD 1000 Mbps, full-duplex (Only Blade2500)
8 Quit Return to previous menu
Please select item (default: 1) [1-8,?]

Start SUNvts (Hardware Analysis)


This starts the SUN VTS package for workstation-hardware testing. The test are self explaining.
Online HELP is available. Make sure to have an actual BACKUP of your system database before
using SUN VTS.

Review installation logs


The installation logs could be helpful to be analyzed if a software installation fails.

1) Review Custom Manager Logfiles


2) PMSdidi Installation Log
3) Database Installation Log

Several log files can be inspected. With “q” the inspection can be stopped.

2-16 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & CUSTOMIZATION

Review Freeware Software Licences

A list of the used freeware licences can be inspected.

Please select licence to review:


1) gnuplot 9) pppd
2) gtar 10) prngd
3) gzip 11) ssh
4) less 12) tcl_tk
5) libjpeg 13) tcsh
6) libpng 14) vnc
7) libxml2 15) Zlib
8) perl
[1-15,?,q] select the required file (s)

Language Management (CD3)


To install the correct language a separate language CDROM is delivered with the system. This item
automatically installs the selected language. Insert the language CDROM into the cdrom drive and
select this item. Select the required language package from the list.
This item is not present just after SW installation. A re-start is required !

NOTE

The system will always be installed in “English” first (=default status after software-installation) .
If another language shall be used, the required language CDROM must be installed.

The corresponding APR sets need to be installed to the generator later.

Add / Remove Extension Level


This item installs an Extension Level from CDROM automatically. No previous package must be
removed before--this process takes care.

Upgrade Reader Software


This item installs the COMPANO Reader Software from a special DIDI READER CDROM to the DIDI
Application Software. The FUJI Software CDROM cannot be used!

This item is NOT used to upgrade the Compano Reader !!!

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-17


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

5 Restore / Save Customer Specific Data and Settings

5.1 Backup
This procedure must be performed at any time modifications are made to the database or software is re-
installed. The BACKUP DOR/CD-R is delivered with the system. It is already labeled.

1. Insert and mount/load Backup-


DOR / CD-R (External Device)

2. Service Tool Set-Up

Backup/Restore

3. Select “Backup”
4. Select target:
MOD/CDR
TRANSFER (directory)
TRANSFER with calibration data
Store for offline configuration

5. Click on “Store” to proceed


6. When completed successfully
click on “Exit” and take out the
medium.

U10 DOR: If the DOR is not formatted


use the “format” button to do so.
If the DOR is full, the system will give
a message.

To delete “OLD” backups completely it


is required to format the DOR. Make
sure the latest backup is kept on
another DOR or on the other side of
the DOR.

Blade 2500: CD-R cannot be re-


written.
Backups can be added (multisession).
No formatting is required!

NOTE:
The BACKUP description is fixed and
cannot be modified.

2-18 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

5.2 Restore
Every restore process automatically sets a “Recovery Point” and reverts to it when the restore did NOT
complete successfully. The restore process can also use the TRANSFER directory.
This process is limited to 4 times and then requires to manually set a Master Recovery Point.

1. Insert :
Backup-DOR / CD-R

2. Select:
Service Tool Set-Up

Backup/Restore

3. Select: “Restore”
4. Select the latest
“BACKUP” file
5. Select: Groups for restore

6. Click on: “Restore” to


proceed
7. When completed
successfully click on “Exit”
and take out the medium.

APC:
Dicom Print & Print Editor
AUDIT:
Audit trail settings
DICOM_NODES:
IPs, AETs etc.
EXAMINATIONS:
Examination set-ups
PATIENT_INFO:
Patient format (Patient list)
PDEF (Patient Data Entry Form)
Sort criteria
QA:
Quality assur. Reject Analysis
RIS_BACK
RIS Bannotation
RIS_HIS:
RIS/BWLM settings.
Mapping
SECURITY:
UnstructuredItems-->
General-->Security
SERVICE&CALIBRATION:
Serviceitems & Calibration
Data.
UNSTRUCTURED:
Unstructured Items excl.
Security.
USERAUTH:
User authentification settings / NOTE:
Login & User set-ups. Use the “right” mouse button
USIT:
USIT mount point
to select “ALL”.
VOCAB:
Mapping for DICOM element “sex”
& “pregnancy status”
DICOM translations

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-19


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

5.3 Set Master Recovery Point

“Set Recovery Point”:


Stores all systems settings
internally at that moment.

“Revert to Recovery
Point”
Starts the system at the
last “Recovery Point.”

Only ONE Recovery


Point can be set.
A NEW “RP “ overwrites
the previous!

If the number off backups exceeds 4, a new recovery point needs to be set !!

2-20 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

5.4 Customization Manager (CM)


The Customization Manager is used to initially set-up the system according to local the environment and for
the license management.

The CM is started after every full software installation.

Figure 5-1, Customization Manager

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-21


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Basic CM Screen:

Figure 5-2, Basic screen

1. Basic functionality of the CM (Customization Manager):

Restore Restores the factory customization CDROM. This will set licenses and
system options to factory defaults as stored on the CDROM.
WARNING: If settings have been changed locally BUT are different to
those on the CDROM, related modifications could be lost !!

Save & Exit The Save button saves the actual CM settings to the hard disk. This
will be combined with data from the DIDI database.

Cancel Cancel closes the CM without any storage. Modified settings are lost.

The CM settings are stored to the BACKUP CDROM but cannot automatically be restored from that
CDROM.

1. Case: Software Re-Installation (no hard disk exchange):


The configuration & the CM settings is available and can be restored completely.

2. Case: Software Re-Installation & hard disk exchange:


The restore of the BACKUP from CDROM does not restore the complete CM settings.
The file “sysinfo.cfg” contains all the Customization settings. The settings need to be re-entered
manually. (Path: BACKUP CDROM:\CONFIG_xxxxx\UNIXBACKUP\CUSTOMIZATION\sysinfo.cfg).

2-22 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

2. General part (left screen):

Licences:
This area shows the activated options/features and their licenses. Input could be manually or by using the
Backup from CDROM or MOD / Factory CD4.

LICENSES Basic Option Dependencies Remarks


Basic X - With every system
Release X - With every system
UNIQUE (X) With every system since 2005
DICOM MPPS X BWLM Only with BWLM
DICOM BWLM X MPPS Not in combination with classic RIS
DICOM Displ. Std (X) With every system
DICOM Print X No combination with EV/Advanced Print.
Local Storage/Dicom Media X Local storage on CDROM/DOR
PCR Reader Integration X Compano & S+ Reader
Auto Stitching X Requires more than only the license
QA_Tools X Reject analysis tool

Release Information window :


This window shows the installed DIDI software Release. This is constantly visible during usage of the tool.

3. Left screen

The following items can be set according to the local situation/configuration or are taken from the inserted
Customization CDROM.

• Site/System Information:

-Site Name
-Customers Name
-Department name
-Device Serial Number
-Order Number
-Host ID

• UI Displayed Date Format

-US
-Sweden
-German
-Multi National 4

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-23


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

System CM Screen:

Figure 5-3, System screen


Table

-TH TH table

-TH-S Single sided table

-none No table
- digital / conventional

- BUF / other BUF: BuckyUnitFamily

Wallstand type

- VE / VT
- VS
- VM
- none
- digital / conventional

- BUF / other

Tomography yes/no

Tracking yes/no

Second CS yes/no

2-24 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

DICOM CM Screen:

Figure 5-4, DICOM Customization screen

According to the entered Licenses, several DICOM features as MPPS / BWLM / Storage Commit are
activated. Some functionality depends on each other and cannot be activated separately.

For additional DICOM set-ups please refer to the section: Service Tools and DICOM UNIT manual.

I.E.: If conventional RIS is active - BWLM cannot be active the same time.

The rest of the screen is self-explaining!

Enable Storage Commit: Must only be active if the customer’s environment offers this option!!

BWLM Factory Settings: If active, the current system setting will be overwritten by factory defaults!!!

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-25


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

RIS Customization Screen

Enable conventional RIS

Send To PCR / USIT Mount Point

RIS Date input format

RIS Backannotation
Back Annotation of local patients

FTP or NFS

Figure 5-5, RIS Customization screen

This screen is used to set-up:

• Send to PCR
If activated RIS data transmitted to DigitalDiagnost will be routed to PCR USIT for the use of free
cassette examinations.

• USIT Mount point (PCR):

Help screen :

NOT for PCR Reaeder Integration !!!

Special situation:

1. DigitalDiagnost uses BWLM

With Release 1.4.1 the Send to PCR file does not use any delimiters (except TABs).
No configuration possible on DiDi side. PCR must be configured in a way that no delimiters are used.

2. DigitalDiagnost uses ASCII RIS

DiDi is routing the RIS file through, to PCR. This file includes the original delimiters sent by RIS.
(orig. RIS file = Send To PCR-RIS file)

Problem:

DiDi : BWLM no delimiters / USIT: ASCII RIS with delimiters

2-26 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

There is a conflict with the delimiters. Files will be rejected by the USIT.
ON USIT: The delimiter set-up can only be done once for both RIS activities.

Solution: Both devices DiDi & PCR must use the same RIS file !!

• Enable Conventional RIS


Conventional RIS does not require a license anymore. To activate conventional RIS only click this
button.

• RIS Date Input Fomat


Select the date format which is sent by the RIS system. If not correct…the RIS data cannot be
handled as required. (If BWLM is activated the RIS Date Input Format is fixed ! )

• RIS Backannotation
If a connected RIS system is capable to use back annotation it can be activated here. The back
annotation file is sent to the HIS_OUT directory. The RIS system needs to fetch the file from that
directory via FTP/NFS.

NOTE

RIS Back annotation can also be used if DICOM BWLM is activated. If MPPS is activated, RIS Back
annotation is in-active.

• Back annotate Local patients:

If active, RIS data from manually entered patients (e.g. emergency patients) is sent as a back-
annotation file to the HIS_OUT directory.

• RIS Transfer Modus

FTP OR NFS
Username : rishis
Password : hisris

• Special for NFS RIS:

UID: 804
or
GID: 800

NOTE:

If you configure conventional RIS via NFS the nfsd and stated RPC services will be started. The Solaris
system is patched with all recommended and security patches up to Sep 2002. However both these services
are considered security risks. We strongly recommend upgrading your RIS services to DICOM BWLM or
conventional RIS via FTP.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-27


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

MISC Customization:

Figure 5-6, MISC Customization screen

This MISC customization screen is used for the following items:

• UNIQUE Postmethods active:

CLASSIC OR UNIQUE PostMethods can be mapped to an AQDS

• CLASSIC Postmethods active

All AQDSs are mapped to CLASSIC PostMethods. UNIQUE is dimmed. If the UNIQUE license is
present CLASSIC and UNIQUE PostMethods can be mapped to an AQDS.

• “None” active
If “None” is selected the CM keeps the current customer settings. If the UNIQUE license is present
CLASSIC and UNIQUE PostMethods can be mapped to an AQDS later.

In case of an upgrade/re-installation the customer settings are kept.


This is the recommended setting for upgrades !!!!

2-28 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

If the CM is used to switch from one to another setting (UNIQUE CLASSIC, the system behaves like
described in the table below:

Post Method Selection (Custom.Manager)


Custom.Manager Existing UNIQUE Existing CLASSIC Existing UNIQUE Existing CLASSIC
PostMethods PostMethods PostMethods PostMethods
factory factory customer customer
Switched from: Replaced with: Remain the same: Replaced with: Remain the same:

UNIQUE CLASSIC PM factory CLASSIC PM factory CLASSIC PM CLASSIC : PM customer


„Default” CLASSIC
Switched from: Remain the same: Replaced with: Remain the same: Remain the same:

CLASSIC UNIQUE PM factory UNIQUE PM factory UNIQUE PM customer UNIQUE PM UNIQUE :


“Default”
NONE All PMs remain the All PMs remain the All PMs remain the All PMs remain the
same same same same

PM = PostMethod

In any case all former used PostMethods are still present in DATA/POST_METHODS. They can be mapped
to an AQDS by using the Configuration Tool.
Only if the UNIQUE license is present, UNIQUE PostMethods can be mapped…but also CLASSIC
PostMethods.

Restore behavior
BACKUP from UNIQUE System BACKUP from CLASSIC System
CLASSIC system factory UNIQUE factory CLASSIC factory UNIQUE ./.
(NO UNIQUE license) factory CLASSIC factory CLASSIC factory CLASSIC remains
customer UNIQUE CLASSIC “Default” customer UNIQUE ./.
customer CLASSIC customer CLASSIC customer CLASSIC remains
UNIQUE System factory UNIQUE remains factory UNIQUE ./.
(UNIQUE license present) factory CLASSIC remains factory CLASSIC remains
customer UNIQUE remains customer UNIQUE ./.
customer CLASSIC remains customer CLASSIC remains

Select correct monitor setting:

- 21 “ Color Screen OR - Flat screen

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-29


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

NET customization screen

Figure 5-7, NET Customization screen (DHCP active)

This screen is used to set-up:

• Network parameters

- Hostname - Netmask
- IP address - Routers (can be more than one. Separation with a space )
- Network IP
- DHCP

When activating DHCP, the IP addressing (incl. hostname) is retrieved/delivered by the hospital
network. The manual input is blocked.

WARNING:
Do not use DHCP with PCR Reader Integration !!
The PCR Reader needs a fixed IP address.

• Timezone (s)
- System (UNIX) & - INGRES

• Date & Time

• Timeserver

If the customer network offers a timeserver enter the IP data here. The system will automatically
update the UNIX time base according to this server.

2-30 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

PRINT customization screen

Figure 5-8, DICOM & PRINT screen

This screen is used to activate Easy Vision Print (Remote Print) for “older” systems. Where DICOM Print is
not available.

• Select Easy Vision Print if required.

• Select “Easy Vision sub sampled print” if required. Usually use “no”.

• If the DICOM Print license is activated it is not possible to select EasyVision Print.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-31


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

ARCHIVER customization screen

Figure 5-9, ARCHIVER Customization screen


This screen shows the current values for:

• Acquisition Number
• Examination Number
• Patient Number

These numbers are usually recovered even after the software is re-installed. If they need to be changed
manually do it here.
A modification can be necessary after a software crash. Make sure the entered numbers are higher than the
numbers the system used before. The PACS system may handle patients/images in-correctly if the same
numbers are used a second time.

If you can still access the system:

1. Open a Command Tool


2. Type in: cdPO
3. Identify the latest image in this directory
4. Type in: more9“imagename”

The data-header within the image shows “logistical” data. It contains also the three required numbers.

• LOCAL STORAGE / DICOM MEDIA(ON DOR / CDROM)

This option is automatically active if the license is filled in. For service purposes this option can be
activated in the Service Tool (DICOM configuration) for 24 hours even if the license is not present.

2-32 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

PCR customization screen

Select the
Reader type:
Compano
or
S+
Reader Integration:
License

READERs IP

Figure 5-10, PCR Customization screen

If the license for PCR Reader Integration is present, the Reader IP address needs to be inserted into the
PCR customization screen.
Make sure to set-up the reader according to what is inserted here! Refer to the UNIT manual “PCR Reader
Integration” for details.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-33


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

6 Shut-down Sequences
To complete a System Shut-down sequence follow the instructions given in the applicable Section that
follows.

Shut-down & switch-off

System Logout Shutdown

User

Password

OK Emergency Password Restart Shutdown

CAUTION

Only a correct shutdown procedure guarantees that the file system does not collapse.
Never switch OFF the System before this procedure is completed!
When using “Shutdown” the system switches OFF finally!

2-34 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

Figure 6-1, Shutdown/Re-Start Procedures

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-35


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

7 Transfer the U10 (1.5.x) Backup to SUN Blade 2500 (1.5.x)

7.1 Required hardware

1. Network CROSS cable


2. An empty BACKUP DOR (for U10)
3. One or more empty CDROMs (For the BLADE)

7.2 Preparation

1. Disconnect the workstation from the local network.


2. Connect both workstations via the network CROSS cable.
3. Set-Up the workstations according to the table below.

SAME Software
Release required to
transfer & restore the
U10 Backup !

U10 SUN Blade 2500


IP Addr. : 42.42.42.42 IP Addr. : 42.42.42.43
Network CROSS cable
Netmask : 255.255.255.0 or Netmask : 255.255.255.0
local network

NOTE

If the two workstations are already connected to the customers network it is possible to use the given IP
settings instead of using cross cable with the shown “dummy” addresses.

2-36 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

7.3 BACKUP-Transfer (U10 Blade)


If only ONE monitor for both workstations is available it needs to be connected to the workstation currently
used. A second monitor could make it easier but is not required.

Ultra 10 (42.42.42.42) remarks SUN Blade 2500 (42.42.42.43)


Install 1.5.x U10 1.5.x: Install 1.5.x Software
Start the Application 1 GB RAM & (if not done already)
Restore 1.4.x BACKUP Creator Graphics
Card required !!
Create 1.5.x BACKUP on DOR Keep the DOR in
Keep the DOR mounted the drive.
(Status Bar)
Connect U10 and
SunBlade with a
Network CROSS
cable or use the
local network.
Set-Up the U10 Use the CM Manager Set-Up the Blade IP- address (i.e):
to set-up IP
IP addresses (i.e) or any other addresses &
Netmasks.
IP : 42.42.42.42 IP : 42.42.42.43
NetMask : 255.255.255.0 NetMask : 255.255.255.0
Remote Login on U10 (Remote Menu)

Open a commandtool:

ssh9service@42.42.42.43

RSA key … YES fingerprint…answer : yes


Service password: ******
From Remote Menu: Select 13 (UNIX)

Copy contents of DOR / EOD


from U10 SunBlade (TRANSFER)

At the UNIX prompt:


scp9-r9/EOD/*9
service@42.42.42.43:/export/home/SABRE/
DATA/TRANSFER

RSA key … YES fingerprint…answer : yes


Service password: ******

Restore the 1.5.x BACKUP (TRANSFER)


from CD-R by using the standard
restore process.
Check/Correct the CM settings.
Create a new 1.5.x BACKUP on the
Blade.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-37


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

7.3.1 Known problem when transferring the Backup

It could happen that the scp (secure copy) / ssh (secure shell) creates strange error messages when the
authorization key changed.:

“ Remote host identification has changed. It is possible….”.

The copy process could not be completed. This could happen if the software has been re-installed.

Solution: Delete all files like “knownhost…” in:

/export/home/SABRE/.ssh/……

Enter a command tool:

cd <return> Access the SABRE home directory:


/export/home/SABRE
cd9.ssh <return>
ls <return> List the content of: .ssh
rm9knownhosts* <return> Removes all files with: “knownhosts…”

Keep the file “authorized_keys” in the directory!!!

7.4 Nice to know commands

7.4.1 Alias to reach the TRANSFER directory

cdT <return>
7.4.2 Software crash. Emergency menu.

When the system software may not start-up or crashes, it re-boots automatically up to five times.
If this is not successful a menu is shown:

It gives you three choices to proceed:

1. Login as service:

This opens the remote service menu and gives some additional changes to solve the problem or to save
several log-files.

2. Revert to the last “Master Recovery Point”

This re-starts the system at the configuration state of the last valid Master Recovery Point

3. Shutdown & Switch Off

This is usually the customer’s action at that status of the system. In this case the local service needs to be
called.

2-38 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

7.4.3 Shutdown & re-start the system by this key-commands in emergency cases:

Use:

STRG & ALT & DEL


Or
Ctrl & ALT & DEL

Stop & a cannot be used while application sw is up and running.

It is only usable during the boot process, shortly after the initializing.

7.4.4 U10: Restore a Backup from CDROM

It is possible to restore a valid BACKUP also from CDROM.

7.4.5 Screenshot stored as jpg to TRANSFER directory

Use: STRG & ALT & F8

This key command takes a current screenshot and stores it to the TRANSFER directory.
It is already .jpg and compressed to an acceptable size.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 2-39


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

SERVICE TOOLS

DigitalDiagnost
Release 1.5.x
13.11.2006

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 5
1.1 General usage of buttons and fields...................................................................................... 5
1.2 Status Bar .............................................................................................................................. 6
1.3 Processing Status.................................................................................................................. 6
1.4 External Device ..................................................................................................................... 6
1.5 Printer queue & control window............................................................................................. 8
1.6 System................................................................................................................................... 9
1.7 Access the Service Tool / Login for service ........................................................................ 10

2 Set-Up ................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 System Configuration .......................................................................................................... 12
2.1.1 Site Overview....................................................................................................................... 13
2.1.2 Unstructured Items .............................................................................................................. 14
2.1.2.1 Other.................................................................................................................................... 14
2.1.2.2 Detector Orientation ............................................................................................................ 15
2.1.2.3 Image Processing................................................................................................................ 15
2.1.2.4 User Interface ...................................................................................................................... 16
2.1.2.5 Security................................................................................................................................ 17
2.1.2.6 DICOM General ................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.2.7 DICOM MPPS...................................................................................................................... 18
2.1.2.8 DICOM BWLM ..................................................................................................................... 18
2.1.2.9 DICOM Storage Commit...................................................................................................... 19
2.1.3 Users ................................................................................................................................... 19
2.1.3.1 How to create a USER without password ........................................................................... 22
2.1.4 DICOM Nodes ..................................................................................................................... 22
2.1.4.1 Archive (PACS), MPPS, IMS (Storage Commit) and the Local settings ............................. 23
2.1.4.2 Clinical QC / Quality Assurance .......................................................................................... 27
2.1.4.3 Patient (DATA) Entry Form.................................................................................................. 28
2.1.4.4 Sort Criteria (Patient List) .................................................................................................... 29
2.1.4.5 Patient Format ..................................................................................................................... 30
2.2 Anatomical Database (ADB)................................................................................................ 34
2.2.1 General handling advices .................................................................................................... 35
2.2.2 TREE structure & handling .................................................................................................. 36
2.2.2.1 Table area............................................................................................................................ 37
2.2.2.1.1 Description of used icons..................................................................................................... 37
2.2.2.1.2 Column handling (table area) .............................................................................................. 37
2.2.2.2 ROOT (Exposure)................................................................................................................ 38
2.2.2.3 Exposure Æ Anatomical Group ........................................................................................... 40
2.2.2.4 Exposure Æ Anatomical Group Æ Examination.................................................................. 41
2.2.2.5 Exposure Æ Anatomical Group Æ Examination Æ Acquisition .......................................... 43
2.2.2.6 How to create a new Examination (new APR new AQDS new EXAMINATION)................ 44
2.2.2.7 DICOM Mapping.................................................................................................................. 44
2.2.2.8 RIS / HIS (Translations)....................................................................................................... 45
2.2.2.9 System Info Screen ............................................................................................................. 46
2.2.3 Classic RIS set-up ............................................................................................................... 47
2.2.3.1 Activate Classic RIS: Customization Manager .................................................................... 47
2.2.3.2 Use the ADB tool to create & map RIS procedure codes: .................................................. 47
2.2.3.3 RIS Translations .................................................................................................................. 49
2.2.3.4 RIS Back Annotation ........................................................................................................... 50
2.2.4 HCU (Printer) Configuration ................................................................................................ 51
2.3 APR Update......................................................................................................................... 51
2.4 DICOM Export Filter ............................................................................................................ 52

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-1


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.5 Display Calibration............................................................................................................... 52


2.6 Wallstand Display Update ................................................................................................... 52
2.7 PCR Reader MUTL (only for COMPANO) .......................................................................... 52
2.8 Backup & Restore................................................................................................................ 53
2.8.1 Preparation: ......................................................................................................................... 53
2.8.2 Backup................................................................................................................................. 53
2.8.3 Restore ................................................................................................................................ 54
2.8.3.1 Set Master Recovery Point (manually)................................................................................ 55
2.8.3.2 Too many restores............................................................................................................... 56

3 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................ 57
3.1 Detector ............................................................................................................................... 57
3.2 CAN Monitor ........................................................................................................................ 58
3.2.1 Remote (CAN) Node List..................................................................................................... 59
3.3 System Control Monitor ....................................................................................................... 63
3.3.1 Firmware Config (Release 1.4 / 1.4.1 / 1.5) ........................................................................ 66
3.3.2 Usage of CAN or System Control Monitor during Examination mode................................. 67
3.4 Ethereal (Network Tool)....................................................................................................... 67

4 Acceptance......................................................................................................................... 68
4.1 Detector Working Conditions............................................................................................... 71
4.2 Detector calibration.............................................................................................................. 71
4.2.1 Auto Pixel-Calibration .......................................................................................................... 71
4.2.2 General Preparation ............................................................................................................ 72
4.2.3 Offset calibration.................................................................................................................. 73
4.2.4 Gain calibration.................................................................................................................... 73
4.2.5 Pixel calibration ................................................................................................................... 74
4.2.6 Tomo Offset calibration ....................................................................................................... 75
4.2.7 Tomo Gain calibration ......................................................................................................... 75
4.2.8 Tomo Pixel calibration ......................................................................................................... 76
4.3 Acceptance Tests ................................................................................................................ 77
4.3.1 Dose Field Flatness............................................................................................................. 77
4.3.2 Electronic Noise................................................................................................................... 78
4.3.3 Mains Hum........................................................................................................................... 79
4.3.4 Linearity ............................................................................................................................... 80
4.3.5 PCR Calibration/Homogeneity............................................................................................. 81
4.3.6 Grid Delay Time................................................................................................................... 82
4.3.7 X-Ray Area .......................................................................................................................... 84
4.3.8 Amplimat Dose Adjustment ................................................................................................. 86
4.3.9 Amplimat Field Test............................................................................................................. 88
4.3.10 Constancy............................................................................................................................ 89
4.3.11 Universal Test Object .......................................................................................................... 90
4.3.12 Visual Erasure Test ............................................................................................................. 90
4.4 Result Tool........................................................................................................................... 92
4.4.1 Result Display...................................................................................................................... 93
4.4.2 Handling the result Information............................................................................................ 94
4.4.3 ECV value............................................................................................................................ 94
4.4.4 Line / colum defects............................................................................................................. 94
4.5 Tic Tool (Test Image Creation Tool).................................................................................... 95

5 Assistance.......................................................................................................................... 96
5.1 Command Tool .................................................................................................................... 96
5.2 Clear calibration................................................................................................................... 96
5.3 Logfiles ................................................................................................................................ 98
5.4 Package Information............................................................................................................ 98
5.5 PCR Scanner Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 99
5.6 Clinical QC (Reject Analysis)............................................................................................... 99
5.6.1 Set-Up & activate Clinical QC (optional) ........................................................................... 100
5.6.2 Export the Image Statistics (Results) ................................................................................ 101
5.6.3 Modify columns in the Image data table............................................................................ 102
5.6.4 Display & Export the statistics results ............................................................................... 102
5.6.5 Export the reject analysis table.......................................................................................... 103

3-2 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

6 Useful Instruction & Functionalities.............................................................................. 103


6.1 Save an image as PNG (Viewer Tool) .............................................................................. 103
6.2 How to check for installed packages or Extension Levels ................................................ 103
6.3 How to create Detector & IQ info files (/DATA/TRANSFER) ............................................. 104
6.4 How to create an homogeneous image (one for table / wall & one tomo) ........................ 105
6.5 How to COPY an image to DOR / CDROM....................................................................... 105
6.6 How to perform a FSCK (filecheck) on DOR (U10 only). .................................................. 106
6.7 How format a DOR via command tool DOR (U10 only) .................................................... 106
6.8 How to create a “blank Image” & Copy to CDROM (U10 Æ DOR) ................................... 106
6.9 How to compress a file ...................................................................................................... 107
6.10 How to COPY a file to FLOPPY (U10 only)....................................................................... 107
6.11 Filemanager (filemgr) ........................................................................................................ 107
6.12 How to create a snapshot.................................................................................................. 108
6.13 How to use an USB Memory Stick (only SUN Blade) ....................................................... 108
6.13.1.1 Manual usage .................................................................................................................... 108
6.13.2 Use “TRANSFER Dir. to USB stick” ................................................................................. 109
6.14 Service Tool: “TRANSFER Dir to Storage Medium”.......................................................... 109

7 Log Files & processes .................................................................................................... 109

8 Reference Plane & Image Scaling.................................................................................. 110

LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1-2, SYSTEM STATUS WINDOW / PROCESS LOGFILES ...................................................................... 9
FIGURE 1-3, LOGIN FOR SERVICE .............................................................................................................. 11
FIGURE 1-4, SERVICE TOOLS (SUN BLADE).............................................................................................. 11
FIGURE 2-1, SITE OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................... 13
FIGURE 2-2, UNSTRUCTURED ITEMS ......................................................................................................... 14
FIGURE 2-3, UNSTRUCTURED ITEMS, GROUP: OTHER.............................................................................. 14
FIGURE 2-4, UNSTRUCTURED ITEMS, GROUP: DETECTOR ORIENTATION ................................................... 15
FIGURE 2-5, UNSTRUCTURED ITEMS, GROUP: USER INTERFACE .............................................................. 16
FIGURE 2-6, UNSTRUCTURED ITEMS, GROUP: SECURITY ......................................................................... 17
FIGURE 2-7, UNSTRUCTURED ITEMS GROUP: DICOM GENERAL .............................................................. 17
FIGURE 2-8, UNSTRUCTURED ITEMS GROUP: DICOM MPPS .................................................................. 18
FIGURE 2-9, UNSTRUCTURED ITEMS GROUP: DICOM BWLM.................................................................. 18
FIGURE 2-10, UNSTRUCTURED ITEMS GROUP: DICOM STORAGE COMMIT ............................................... 19
FIGURE 2-11, USERS ............................................................................................................................... 19
FIGURE 2-12, DICOM NODES .................................................................................................................. 22
FIGURE 2-13, ARCHIVE NODES ................................................................................................................. 23
FIGURE 2-14, DICOM BWLM NODES ...................................................................................................... 24
FIGURE 2-15, DICOM MPPS NODES ....................................................................................................... 25
FIGURE 2-16, DICOM IMS NODES ........................................................................................................... 25
FIGURE 2-17, DICOM WORKFLOW ........................................................................................................... 26
FIGURE 2-18, QUALITY ASSURANCE / REJECT ANALYSIS............................................................................ 27
FIGURE 2-19, PDEF (PATIENT (DATA) ENTRY FORM) .............................................................................. 28
FIGURE 2-20, SORT CRITERIA .................................................................................................................. 29
FIGURE 2-21, PATIENT FORMAT................................................................................................................ 30
FIGURE 2-22, ADB MAIN SCREEN ............................................................................................................. 34
FIGURE 2-23, ANATOMICAL DB STRUCTURE .............................................................................................. 35
FIGURE 2-24, ROOT ACQUISITIONSETUPS ................................................................................................. 38
FIGURE 2-25, REPLACE POST METHOD..................................................................................................... 38
FIGURE 2-26, ROOT: EXAMINATIONS ....................................................................................................... 39
FIGURE 2-27, ROOT: DICOMPATIENTORIENTATION ................................................................................ 39
FIGURE 2-29, ANATOMICAL GROUPS SCREEN ........................................................................................... 40
FIGURE 2-30, EXAMINATION SET-UP SCREEN ........................................................................................... 41
FIGURE 2-31, ADD ACQUISITION ............................................................................................................... 42
FIGURE 2-32, AQDS SET-UP ................................................................................................................... 43
FIGURE 2-33, AQDS ITEMS ...................................................................................................................... 43
FIGURE 2-34, SYSTEM INFO SCREEN ........................................................................................................ 46

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-3


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

FIGURE 2-35, CM MANAGER (CLASSIC RIS) ............................................................................................. 47


FIGURE 2-36, ADB RIS/HIS .................................................................................................................... 47
FIGURE 2-37, RIS BACKANNOTATION ....................................................................................................... 50
FIGURE 2-38, APR UP-DATE TOOL .......................................................................................................... 51
FIGURE 3-1, DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS TOOL ............................................................................................. 57
FIGURE 3-2, CAN MONITOR ..................................................................................................................... 58
FIGURE 3-3, CAN MONITOR PLOT ............................................................................................................ 58
FIGURE 3-4, REMOTE (CAN) NODE LIST (EXAMPLE) .................................................................................. 59
FIGURE 3-5, SYSTEM CONTROL MONITOR ................................................................................................. 63
FIGURE 3-6, SYSTEM CONTROLLER PLOT SCREEN .................................................................................... 64
FIGURE 3-7, FW CONFIGURATION (SCREEN).............................................................................................. 66
FIGURE 4-1, IMAGE QUALITY TOOL (ACCEPTANCE).................................................................................... 68
FIGURE 4-2, GENERAL USAGE OF THE SCREEN .......................................................................................... 70
FIGURE 4-3, MAINS HUM IMAGE ................................................................................................................ 79
FIGURE 4-4, GRID DELAY TIME IMAGE ....................................................................................................... 82
FIGURE 4-5, GRID DELAY TIME IMAGE (SCALE 1/2) .................................................................................... 83
FIGURE 4-6, X-RAY AREA IMAGE .............................................................................................................. 85
FIGURE 4-7, CONSTANCY ......................................................................................................................... 89
FIGURE 4-8, VISUAL ERASURE FIRST IMAGE (LOW DOSE) ........................................................................... 91
FIGURE 4-9,VISUAL ERASURE FIRST IMAGE (HIGH DOSE)............................................................................ 91
FIGURE 4-10, RESULT TOOL, MAIN SCREEN.............................................................................................. 92
FIGURE 4-11, RESULT DISPLAY (TYPE I) ................................................................................................... 93
FIGURE 4-12, RESULT DISPLAY (TYPE II) .................................................................................................. 93
FIGURE 4-13, TIC TOOL .......................................................................................................................... 95
FIGURE 5-1, LOG FILES ............................................................................................................................ 98
FIGURE 5-2, PACKAGE INFO ..................................................................................................................... 98
FIGURE 5-3, CLINICAL QC (IMAGE STATISTICS) ......................................................................................... 99
FIGURE 5-4, QC IMAGE STATISTICS ........................................................................................................ 100
FIGURE 5-6, IMAGE TABLE RESULT EXPORT ............................................................................................ 101
FIGURE 5-8, STATISTICS – EXPORT ........................................................................................................ 102
FIGURE 6-1, SAVE AS PNG FROM THE VIEWING TOOL .............................................................................. 103
FIGURE 8-1, SELECTING THE REQUIRED REFERENCE PLANE (AQDS)....................................................... 110

3-4 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

1 Introduction
The DigitalDiagnost Service Tool is a software package used to test or set-up different areas and functions of
the DigitalDiagnost System.
When logged in for service the user can switch from service tools to patient list without logging in/out.
New users can be created by Philips local service to allow restricted access to the Service Tools area.

Important Note:
It is strictly forbidden to give the service & install passwords to anyone who is not authorized.
The customer and the local Philips engineer accept full responsibility for the creation of local users and
passwords.

1.1 General usage of buttons and fields


To keep all tools/screens consistent some general buttons always have a similar functionality. They are
explained here and not explicitly for every screen. Special buttons are explained for every screen:

ADD starts an extra screen to add new items to a list. Details


Add can be selected out of special selection pop-ups.

EDIT opens the EDIT tool to modify an activated item from a


Edit
list.

INSERT fills in a new item above or below the activated list-


Insert (above/below)
item.

Duplicate DUPLICATE copies an activated item from a list.

New NEW creates a new item/set-up.

DELETE deletes the activated queue items (marked black).


Delete

DELETE ALL deletes the whole list / queue etc..


Delete all

Save Apply SAVE / Apply saves modified data to disk.

OK OK saves modified data to disk and quit the actual screen.

CANCEL quits the modifications without saving them.


Cancel

RETURN closes the screen and jumps back to the previous


Return screen.

HELP gives a short online help-screen.


Help

EXIT closes a window or leaves a tool. If data was


EXIT changed make sure SAVE was used.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-5


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Some screens have toggle buttons which activate a list of choices to


be activated.
Use the cursor (mouse) to click on the small internal button (left
mouse button) and move the cursor to the required selection of the
pop-up list. Release the left mouse button to confirm this selection.

1.2 Status Bar


The Status Bar is accessible during (nearly) every system activity. It is used to display information about
different processes and/or status information. Errors can be indicated with a color turn from “normal” green to
red.
Yellow is displayed to indicate a “temporary” not ready status while a dark image is acquired. If this happens in
the System Status window (most right) this indicates that a Dark Image is taken automatically.
If the HCU (DICOM Print) or the External Device windows is yellow, the device is set to PAUSE.
In case of an error the display right to the button(s) shows a text indication on a red background. If a message
(not an error) it can be displayed on a yellow background or the green background.

1.3 Processing Status


The processing window gives information about the status of the processing of images. If the window is empty
no image is in the processing queue.

1.4 External Device


This window displays status information about active DICOM devices connected to the system as:

DICOM nodes for VERIFY (list of archive nodesÆ UI descriptions are displayed)
i.e.:
BWLM
EV
PACS
etc…
Device
i.e.:
Storage Medium (CDROM / DOR)
DICOM

3-6 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

NOTE

The devices are selectable only if they are installed (licenses).

1 2

Buttons & Fields

DICOM nodes (description)


1
The DICOM Set-Up must be performed first. Refer to DICOM set-up.
“User Interface Description” from DICOM Nodes: ARCHIVE

Verify(DICOM)
2
This performs a “DICOM” ping to the defined nodes. It check if the nodes are present and ready for
DICOM.
3 Queue window
Shows status of images sent to the devices.

4 Device
Selects the device for storage to be displayed in the queue window.

Stops the image transfer to the DEVICE/NODE temporarily. The


Pause images are visible in the queue and stays there until they are
printed or deleted.
Delete Deletes the marked images from the queue.

Delete All Deletes ALL images from the the queue.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-7


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Storage / Retrieve on / from Storage Medium (DOR/CD-R)

The store to DOR / CD-R function is an optional function of the system. If not applicable officially, it can be
activated temporarily as a 24h option in the Customization Tool.

DEVICE = Storage Medium

ONLY ACTIVE FOR DOR / Optical Disk (CD-R):


Mounts an optical disk which is loaded into the optical disk drive
Load into the UNIX file system. It is ready as soon as the status
window shows disk information and the Status Bar window
shows “loaded”. The load process is only possible with a
formatted/labeled DOR or CD-R.
Unload Deactivates the inserted Storage Medium from the UNIX file
system. The Storage Medium can be taken out of the drive.

DOR only ! (not for CDROM): Formats the inserted DOR. This
Format deletes all data !

Read Index.. READ INDEX is used to import stored images/patients on


Storage Medium into the patient list of the system. This does not
copy an image to disk!

1.5 Printer queue & control window

For more details please refer to the UNIT Manual DICOM Print.
Use the Service Tool for configuration and calibration of the printer.

Special Buttons & Fields

Pause Pause the output to the imager (temporary).

Delete Deletes the marked images from the queue.

Delete All
Deletes ALL images from the the queue.

3-8 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

1.6 System

The System Window is used for:

Logout / Login
Enter the Service Tool.

Show different status messages:

- Detector Status ( result of the calibration )


- Last Calibration
- Last Assurance (Quality Assurance)
- System Status

Figure 1-2, System Status Window / Process logfiles

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-9


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

1.7 Access the Service Tool / Login for service

Login for service when the user is not logged in for service:

1. Click on System in the ”Status Bar” at the right bottom of


the screen.
2. Click on Logout in the screen that is displayed.
3. The Login screen opens.

4. Login for service:

User: service
Password: ********

When the user is already logged in for service:

1. Click on System in the ”Status Bar” at the bottom


right of the screen.
2. Click on Service in the screen that is displayed.
5. The Service Tool opens.

NOTE
The password cannot be entered unless the cursor is positioned in the “pop-up” screen where the
password is to be entered.
When the user is already logged in as “service” the service tools can be entered directly !

3-10 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Login for service:

Figure 1-3, Login for service

Only visible
when activated.
Only visible for
SUN Blades

Only visible when


Figure 1-4, Service Tools (SUN Blade) license present

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-11


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2 Set-Up

2.1 System Configuration

Item Name Called Frames/Items


System Overview Display of System Options
Site Name
Dept. Name
Language
Date Format
Todays Date (only display)
Unstructured Items

DICOM Nodes DICOM Node Configuration


(&configuration) ARCHIVE- / BWLM- / MPPS- / IMS- / LOCAL Nodes
DICOM Patient Orientation
DICOM General Items
DICOM BWLM Items
DICOM MPPS Items
DICOM Storage Commit Items
(Options Storage(C_STORE), Storage Commit, Local
Storage)
Users Definition of additional users.
QC / QA Reject Analysis Tool
PatientEntryForm Selection of database items for Patient Data Entry Form
Sort Criteria Primary/secondary/tertiary Attributes
Patient Format: Patient Format List for …
Examinations Source
Patients Source
Literal

NOTE
After any modification a System Restart must be performed to activate the new settings.

3-12 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.1.1 Site Overview

Figure 2-1, Site Overview

The Site Overview screen shows all active or inactive options and applicable licenses of the particular system.
The license protected options can not be activated if no license was given while the software was installed.

Licenses:

OptAutoStitching Automatic stitching (requires Autostitching ruler )


OptBWLM BasicWorklistManagement
OptDICOMDispl.Std Dicom Display Greylevel Std.
OptHCU DICOM Print
OptHCUAdvanced HardCopyUnit Print Editor
OptMPPS ModalityPerformedProc.Step
OptQATools Reject analysis tools
OptUNIQUE UNIQUE Processing
StoOptDOR Local Storage to DOR/CD-R
(DICOM Media)
System Options:

OptEVPrint EasyVision remote print


OptPCR PCR Integrated in DiDi (Compano/S+)
OptRGDVTableFlat Table with Digital Detector
OptRGDVTable Table conventional
OptRGDVWallFlat Wall Stand with Digital Detector
OptRGDVWall Wall conventional

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-13


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

OptRGDVTomo Tomography
OptRis classic RIS (no license required !)
OptRisBack RIS Back annotation
OptSecondTube Second CS / Tube
OptStCommit Storage Commitment
OptUsitForward Image forwarded to PCR USIT
OptWallBUF BuckyUnitFamily in the Wall Stand
OptTableBUF BuckyUnitFamily in the TH table
StoOptDICOM Store DICOM Images
SecondTube Second Tube present

2.1.2 Unstructured Items

Figure 2-2, Unstructured Items

2.1.2.1 Other

Name Value Description


DaysToTidyUpEmptyPatient 3 days Non examined patients are deleted after the specified
time.
Days ToTidyUpPatient 7 days Examined patients with no images are deleted after the
specified time.
QualityAssuranceTimeout 1 month Time between two Quality Assurance tests
ScreenSaver 180 seconds Time in seconds to activate the screen saver (blank)
with no user action
ExtendedDarkCycleTime 120 seconds Cycle time of the extended dark image timing in
seconds (0-600)

Figure 2-3, Unstructured Items, GROUP: Other

3-14 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

ExtendedDarkCycletime

The value of 120 seconds the best compromise between high throughput and the risk of memory structures in
the image. If decreased the risk will increase.

2.1.2.2 Detector Orientation

Name Value Description


DDFFrontWall left Definition of the side where the wall stand control panel is
mounted and how the detector is mounted.
This influences the way the image is shown. Image could be
up-side down.
HeadSideTable left Definition of the side where the patient head is placed. This
influences the way the image is shown. Image could be up-
side down.

Figure 2-4, Unstructured Items, GROUP: Detector Orientation

NOTE
If one of the items is changed the Detector Calibration is invalid. Æ Re-Calibration

2.1.2.3 Image Processing

Name Value Description


AdvancedCalibration no Automatic Gain Calibration. Refer to the Service Manuals for
details.
ShutterBorderOffset 0 Shutter Border Offset in mm >=0 mm

Advanced Calibration

In addition to the implemented AUTO-PIXEL calibration the AUTO GAIN calibration could be activated.
YES= Auto Gain Calibration is active.

Shutter Border Offset

If set to 0 mm Æ Shutter = X-Ray border.


Any other value > 0 will increase the shutter size and makes it possible to see the x-ray border.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-15


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.1.2.4 User Interface

NAME Value Access Description


DisplayCalibTimeout 1 month Service Time between Display Calibrations.
OptDisplayCalibration no Service Enable Display Calibration Feature
DefaultAccessionNumber none User Default accession number if the value is empty. Special
PACS system (00000000), DICOM (none).
DetectorCalibTimeout 1 month User Time between detector calibrations
EmergencyPatiFirstname none User The firstname field of the emergency patient.
EmergencyPatiHasNumber yes User Has each emergency patient a new number(ID)
(yes/no).
EmergencyPatiLastname Emergency User Lastname field of the emergency patient which will be
need for display in the banner.
EmergencyPatientIdMax 100000 User The maximum number for the emergency patient ID-
Number.
EmergencyPatientIdMin 90000 User The start number for the emergency patient ID-
Number.
ExamWorklistShowToday no User Filter the examination worklist to show only
examinations scheduled for today.
ExamWorklistSortReverse no User Invert sort order of examination worklist to sort most
recently added examinations first
GridWarning yes User Show a Grid Warning on the workstations user
interface when the grid status deviates from default.
GridWarningOnCtrlHdl yes User Show a Grid Warning on the control handle when the
grid status deviates from default.
LengthUnits cm User Units for displaying length measurements in Viewer
(mm/cm/in).
MTRCodeField optional User Operator code field appears on the EXAMUI
(none/optional).
MTRCodeFieldCleared no User Operator code field cleared for each patient, else to
same Operator (yes/no).
MandatoryPrintLabels no User Set yes if setting print labels should be mandatory in
the Verification Tool (yes/no).
MandatoryShutterDialog yes User Set yes if Verification Tool should display a warning
message before allowing manual shutter change
ManualAPROverrule no User Manual APR overrule on the XRG. If enabled, DICOM
MPPS may return a wrong performed protocol code
VeriImageSubSampleFactor 4 User Verification Image Subsampling Factor (2/4). 2=>High
Resolution (NB:time to display multiplied by 4)
ViewerExpertMode no User Show or hide the button "Expert Settings" (processing
details) in the Viewer (yes/no).

Figure 2-5, Unstructured Items, GROUP: User Interface

3-16 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.1.2.5 Security

NAME Value Description


AutoLogoutTime 300 Time until Auto-Logout after last user input
DeIdentLogData no Erase (non-reconstructably) all patient identifying data in
logging output
LoginFailMax 5 Number of login failures allowed before account is locked
NoAdminWarning yes Warn if there is no user with Password Administrator
privileges
OperatorNameOverride no Operator Name can be changed in Examination UI
PasswordHistory 12 Number of passwords remembered for duplicate checking
PasswordMaxAge 0 Maximum time until password must be changed (default value)
PasswordMinAge 0 Minimum time between password changes
PasswordMinClasses 3 Minimum number of different character classes that must be
present in password
PasswordMinLength 6 Mimimum length of password
PwAdminOverride no Password Administrator can override user name & password
requirements
RequireUserLogin yes Login with user name and password required to gain access to
workstation
RetainUserName no Current User Name is displayed after auto-logout
UserNameCaseSens no Whether user names must be entered with the correct case
UserNameMinLength 6 Minimum length of user (login) name
UserNameSpecialChars _- Which non-alphanumeric characters are allowed in user names
OperatorNameMenuMax 10 Max number of previous Operator Names shown in menu

Figure 2-6, Unstructured Items, GROUP: Security

2.1.2.6 DICOM General

NAME Value Description


ArchiveRetryCount 1000 The number of retries the archiver executes for every storage
operation.
ArchiveRetryTimeout 100 The time (in 1/10 seconds) the archiver waits between retries of
storage operations.
DICOMArtimTimeout 20 Number of seconds waiting for an association request or for the
peer to shut down an association.
DICOMAssocReplyTimeout 20 Number of seconds waiting for a reply to an association request
or an association release.
DICOMResponseTimeout 15 Number of seconds waiting for a response.
StationID Digital Diagnost DICOM label identifying the machine that generated the digital
image (0008,1010).
StoLocalIOD DX Local Storage Image Object Definition (CR/DX)
UnprocessedExport no Export DICOM images unprocessed / processed (yes/no)

Figure 2-7, Unstructured Items GROUP: DICOM General

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-17


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.1.2.7 DICOM MPPS

NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION


MppsRetryCount 1000 Max. number of MPPS retries.
MppsRetryInterval 60 Number of seconds between MPPS retries.

Figure 2-8, Unstructured Items GROUP: DICOM MPPS

2.1.2.8 DICOM BWLM

NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION


AETWildCard no Supporting query wildcard (* and ?) for the broad query input
field AETitle.
AETWildCardExpr AET (local) wildcard expression for the broad query, e.g.
"DIDI*".
BackgroundQuery no Run the periodic background broad query (yes/no).
BroadAET yes The Digital Diagnost AET Title is included as matching key in
the broad query (yes/no).
BroadDate no Run the broad query with date matching (yes/no).
BroadMaxItems 1000 If a broad query returns more items, only the first <max items>
are evaluated (1 - 1200).
BroadModality no The Modality type is included as matching key in the broad
query (yes/no).
BroadTimeInterval 60 Time interval for background broad queries (10-3600 seconds).
BroadUITimeout 30 The max. time (seconds) of the UI query panel waiting for
response status (via TT).
DateRange today Set the date matching type if the DateKey is set to yes
(today/today or later/today or earlier).
ModalityType CR Matching key value in broad or patient query, to be agreed with
RIS admin. (CR/DX/CR+DX).
PatientAET yes The Digital Diagnost AET Title is included as matching key in
the patient query (yes/no).
PatientAccessionNo yes The accession number is included in the patient query window
(yes/no).
PatientDICOMName yes Patient Name is only one entry field, expecting DICOM-format
(FamillyName^FirstName).
PatientDate no Run the patient query (internally) with date matching (yes/no).
PatientID yes The Patient ID is included in the patient query window
(yes/no).
PatientMaxItems 100 If a patient query returns more items, only the first <max
items> are evaluated (1 - 1200).
PatientModality no The Modality type is included in the patient query (yes/no).
PatientName yes The Patient Name is included in the patient query window
(yes/no).
PatientNameWildCard no Supporting query wildcard (* and ?) for the query input field
patient name.
PatientReqProcID yes The Requested Procedure Id is included in the patient query
window (yes/no).
PatientUITimeout 30 The max. time (seconds) of the UI query panel waiting for
response status (via TT).

Figure 2-9, Unstructured Items GROUP: DICOM BWLM

3-18 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.1.2.9 DICOM Storage Commit

NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION


StCommitNActionDelay 0 Number of seconds to delay a storage commit request.
StCommitNEventTimeout 0 Number of seconds waiting for a N-Event report in a same
association.
StCommitRetryCount -1 Number of storage commitment request retries (no limit = -1).
StCommitRetryTimeout 30 Number of seconds between storage commitment request
retries.

Figure 2-10, Unstructured Items GROUP: DICOM Storage Commit

2.1.3 Users

Figure 2-11, Users

The system offers several default (system-) users, which are fixed. They cannot be modified or deleted.
The current user can add new users on his own or a lower access level if his profile allows this action.

Default (system) users :

User Password Comment


Default: No password
sabre Default user. Password can be added
Can be added by service
service ******* Philips Service / also remote
External remote Service
rservice *******
(for PMS authorized external companies)
rishis hisris HIS/RIS via ftp/sftp/scp
Install user to access Customization Manager &
install *******
Installation Manager
emergency No password Emergency user.
restart - -

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-19


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

According to the user hierarchy & the profile a new user can be added/removed or an existing user can be
modified. Passwords can be checked or changed.
For all users a password is required !!

Use the buttons below or use the right mouse click on a selected user to perform the required action:

1. Add User

Login Name: This is the user name

Operator Name: free text

Description: free text

Access Level: Definition of the access level for


that user.
The last access level includes
ALL the above access
authorizations.

User: This is the “normal” customer.


Calibration: + Detector calibration access
The password must comply with these rules: User Service: + Restricted service access
QA User: + QA access / QC access
Password Admin: + Restrict. Password admin.
Key Admin: + general admin. Function
PMS Service: + all other configuration & admin
Functions

Account Expires: The account can be limited for a


time period.

Lock account: The amount of wrong entered


passwords until the systems
locks.

Password expires: The validity of a password can be


limited for a time period.

Password &
Repeat Password:

3-20 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2. Edit User:

What can be modified:

• Operator Name
• Description
• Access Level
• Account expires
• Lock Account
• User can change password
• Password expires

3. Change Password

The password of the selected user can be changed.

This is only possible when the profile or level of the


current access allows this modification!

4. Remove User

A selected user can be removed.

This is only possible when the profile or level of the


current access allows this action.

System Users (blue background) cannot be removed.

5. Check Password

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-21


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.1.3.1 How to create a USER without password

1. Enter Service Tool and change the setting of: “PWAdminOverride”

Service Tool Æ Configuration Æ Unstructured Æ Security Æ PWAdminOverride = Yes

2. Create a new USER without a password

2.1.4 DICOM Nodes

This section only gives a short description of relevant set-ups for DICOM.

Figure 2-12, DICOM Nodes

This screen is used to set the DICOM nodes for all the DICOM peripherals (except DICOM Print) and the local
DICOM settings:

3-22 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.1.4.1 Archive (PACS), MPPS, IMS (Storage Commit) and the Local settings

1. DICOM Archive Nodes

Figure 2-13, Archive Nodes

DICOM Storage(C_Store):
This generally activated the DICOM storage to
the defined device.
Storage Commit
When supported by the customers
environment, this item can be activated.
Local Storage (DICOM Media)
Local storage to MOD/CDROM . DX or CR
Can be activated for24h when no license
present.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-23


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Item Selection Description/ Remarks

Remote AET xxxxxx AETitle of the remote device

User Interface yyyyyy Description shown in the User Interface


Description
Remote Host zzzzzz IP address of the remote device

Remote Port No. xxxx Port number of the remote device

Export Filter None/filters DICOM Export Filter (refer to separate


manual)
Study Desc. Empty/Exam Item/SPS desc. ?

Active Yes/No

Commit Yes/No Storage Commitment

Exp. Prv. Att. Yes/No This needs to be set to YES when Remote
Print EV is used.
Export Private Attributes
Usually: NO
EV.Fwd.AET Yes/No AET of the receiving Easy Vision

CR/DX CR/DX Selection of CR / DX standard

Secure Yes/No Currently no function

Encryption Yes/No Currently no function

Certificate Yes/No Currently no function

2. DICOM BWLM / MPPS / IMS Nodes

Figure 2-14, DICOM BWLM Nodes

3-24 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Figure 2-15, DICOM MPPS Nodes

Figure 2-16, DICOM IMS Nodes

IMS Nodes can only be used when Storage Commit is activated.

Field Selection / Input Description/ Remarks

Remote AETitle XXXX AETitle of the remote device

User Interface Description XXXX Description shown in the User Interface

Remote Host xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx IP address of the remote device

Remote Port No. xxxx Port number of the remote device

Active Yes/No Activate/deactivate the node.

Secure Yes/No Currently no function

Encryption Yes/No Currently no function

Certificate Yes/No Currently no function

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-25


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

3. DICOM , general workflow

Hospital
Hospital NET
NET DigitalDiagnost
DigitalDiagnost EXAMUI
storage to HIS_IN
(patient list)
BWLM
(DICOM RIS)

C_find / worklist qeuery BWLM SCU HIS_IN

fetch from HIS_IN


MPPS update
N_create (Examination initiated)
MPPS SCU
MPPS
N_set (Examination finished)
risConn

DICOM Print HIS_REJECT


DICOM Printer basic greyscale print management
Print SCU

data storage

DataBase DIDI
PACS / ARCHIV DataBase DIDI
C-store (IMAGE) Archiver
Storage SCU

Storage Commit request

N_action request

N_event report

IMS
Workflow Manager
C_ECHO to AET (i.e. IMS) VERIFY DICOM "ping" DICOM DICOM Agent
Verification Storage Commit SCU
answer Verification SCP
SCU

any C_ECHO VERIFY from "outside")

AET answer DICOM workflow


V:\Innovatn\Digital Diagnost\Dokumentation\
Release1_4\DiDiWorkstation1_4\UNITS\Dicom1_4\
DigitalDiagnost
VISIO\

Figure 2-17, DICOM Workflow

3-26 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.1.4.2 Clinical QC / Quality Assurance

The Reject Analysis tool offers the possibility to add a specified reason for a repeated image. The user is
prompted to a list of reasons when repeating an image.
The list below is default and can be modified according to the customer’s requirements.

Figure 2-18, Quality Assurance / Reject Analysis

Input Fields Description/ Remarks

Reason Code The “Reason Descriptions” are shown for selection when
Reject is pressed. Free text.
Text (Description) Free text description

Last Modified Date of last modification

Action Description/ Remarks

Add Item New items can be added. In this case a new “reason”

Delete Item Deletes the marked entry from the list

Move Up / Down Moves the marked entry up/down within the list

Require Reason when Reject pressed When active:


The “Reason Descriptions” are shown for selection when
Reject is pressed.
Require Reason when Default Export Yes/No: If Yes the user is forced to select a “reason” out of a
Disabled pre-defined list.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-27


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.1.4.3 Patient (DATA) Entry Form

This tool defines how the Patient Entry Form looks like and which entries are to be made.

Figure 2-19, PDEF (Patient (DATA) Entry Form)

Input Fields Description/ Remarks

In Patient Entry Form A new item can be added

Field Name Select field / database item from the pop-up list.

Label Enter the label (description) which is displayed in PDEF.


Free text !
Description The description is linked to the selected Field Name

Action Description/ Remarks

Add Item A new item can be added

Delete Item Deletes the marked entry from the list

Move Up / Down Moves the marked entry up/down within the list

Save Changes All changes are saved to disk

Cancel Changes All changes are cancelled

3-28 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.1.4.4 Sort Criteria (Patient List)

Figure 2-20, Sort Criteria

Action Description/ Remarks

Sort Name The name in this list is the description that is shown in the
Patient List when the button “Sorted by:” (above the “Select”/
“View“ buttons) is clicked. It is only a name pointing to the Field
Name in the database.
The order in which the name is in the column is the order in
which it is displayed when the “Sorted by:” button is clicked.
Primary/Secondary/ The relevant field name from the database to which reference is
Tertiary Attributes to be made is typed in here. There are a maximum of three (3)
sort attributes possible. The system refers to the databases in
the order of primary first and tertiary last.
Asc/Desc This determines if the data from the databases is to be displayed
in an ascending or descending sequence.

Action Description/ Remarks


Add Item A new item can be added

Delete Item Deletes the marked entry from the list

Move Up / Down Moves the marked entry up/down within the list

Save Changes All changes are saved to disk

Cancel Changes All changes are cancelled

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-29


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.1.4.5 Patient Format

Figure 2-21, Patient Format

This tool is used to modify contents and formats of the Patient List , Service List , Banner , Examination
List & Wallstand Display

Action Description

Add Item A new item can be added

Delete Item Deletes the marked entry from the list

Move Up / Down Moves the marked entry up/down within the list

Save Changes All changes are saved to disk

Cancel Changes All changes are cancelled

NOTE:
Some settings are user-language dependant. If the language is changed, literal entries may be different
to what is used here.

3-30 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Aqdsinfo (default) :
Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length
Literal Exam Date/Time 1
Examinations examinationdate 4 16
Literal Acc.Number 1
Examinations accessionnumber 1 16

Aqdsinfo DICOM (default):


Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length
Literal Exam Date/Time 1
Examinations examinationdate 4 16
Literal SPS-Desc 1
Examinations scheduledprocstepdesc 1 25
Literal Acc.Number = 1
Examinations accessionnumber 1 16
Literal RqProcID= 1
Examinations requestedprocid 1 12
Literal RqProcDesc= 1
Examinations requestedprocdesc 1 25

Aqdsinfo SERVICE (Service Tool)


This entries are for the acceptance tool. Do not modify !!

Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length


Literal Exam Date/Time 1
Patients PatiPatientid 1 12
Literal Acc.No: 1
Examinations accessionnumber 1 16

BWS_DISPLAY_1,2,3,4 (Display for WallStand, optional):

BWS1

Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length


Start=0 Last Name Patients PatiPatientSurname 0

BWS2

Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length


Start=0 Last Name Patients PatiPatientSurname 0
Start=45 Date of Birth Literal 0
Patients PatiPatientBirthDate 1

BWS3

Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length


Start=0 PID/Accession Patients PatiPatientid 1
No.
Literal / 1
Examinations accessionnumber 0

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-31


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

BWS4

Headerline Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length


Start=0 APR Literal \APR_PATTERN 20
Start=80 Grid Literal \GRID_PATTERN 0

Never modify the dark framed areas of the tables. They contain items for positioning and database-
selection. Any modification may show strange effects in the display !!

Patient List: Display when patient is “opened” within the list:

ExamOpen:
PatientList: Info after the “open” button is pressed related to the activated patient.

Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length


Literal 2
Examinations examinationitem 1 24
Literal Acc. Number 1
Examinations accessionnumber 1 13
Examinations examinationdate 1 16
Literal Expos.= 1
Examinations examnoacquisitions 1 2
Literal Imag./Disk = 1
Examinations examnoimagefiles 1 2

ExamOpenDicom
In addition to list “ExamOpen” the following item is activated:

Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length


Literal Commited = 1

ExamOpenService
This list is reserved for the acceptance tool list. NEVER TOUCH !

NormalList 1,2,3,4:
The Normal List 1 to 4 contains all fields displayed in the patient list table.

PatientList1: The most left (default) shown area.


PatientList 2-4: Shown when scrolling to right.

NormalList1 (Patient List1)

Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length


Last Name Patients patipatientsurname 1 30
First Name Patients patipatientchristianname 1 20
Title Patients patipatientPrefix 1 10
Date of Birth Patients patipatientbirthdate 2 11
Sex Patients PatiPatientSex 5 1
Patient ID Patients patipatientid 1 16
Doctor Patients patipatientdoctor 1 12
Exposures Patients examnoacquisitions 0 9

3-32 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

NormalList2(Patient List2)

Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length


Last Name Patients patipatientsurname 1 20
First Name Patients patipatientchristianname 4 10
Medical Alerts Patients PatiMedicalAlerts 1 22
Special Needs Patients PatiSpecialNeeds 1 22
Contrast Allergy Patients PatiContrastAllergies 1 23
Preg nacy Patients PatiPregnancyStatus 0 16

NormalList3 (Patient List3)

Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length


Last Name Patients patipatientsurname 1 20
First Name Patients patipatientchristianname 10 10
Middle Name Patients PatiPatientMiddleName 1 26
Prefix Patients PatiPatientPrefix 1 20
Suffix Patients PatiPatientSuffix 1 20

NormalList4 (Patient List4)

Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length


Last Name Patients patipatientsurname 1 20
First Name Patients patipatientchristianname 10 10
Patient Counter Patients PatiPatientNumber 3 7
Record Type Patients PatiRecordType 3 6
Device Number Patients PatiDeviceSerialNumber 1 9

WARNING
Implementing the ACCESSIONNUMBER into the Patient List is not possible!

This leads to inconsistencies (crash of the PLM process). PLM = Patient List Manager

PBC (Plate Barcode) Pop-Up contents for non-linked PCR plates.


Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length
Patients patipatientsurname 1 20
Examinations examinationitem 1 20
Patients PatiPatientid 1 10
Patients PatiissuerOfPatienID 1 10

ServiceList1:
This list is reserved for the acceptance tool list. NEVER TOUCH !

Id:
Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length
Patients patipatientid 0

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-33


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

INFO / INFO DICOM


Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length
Literal Patient ID = 1
Patients PatiPatientid 1
Literal Sex = 1
Patients PatiPatientSex 6
Literal Date of Birth 1
Patients patipatientbirthdate 1
Literal Doctor = 1
Patients patipatientdoctor 6

Name:
Headerline 1 Headerline 2 Source Attribute Gap Length
Patients patipatientsurname 5
Patients patipatientchristianname 0

Testname:
For development only. Do not touch !

2.2 Anatomical Database (ADB)

Main tabs Sub selection tabs

Table area

Tree area

Function keys
Figure 2-22, ADB main screen

3-34 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Anatomical Groups / Examinations / AQDS and more


( Abdomen taken as an example )

Anatomical Groups
Abdomen LOWER PELVIS SKULL SPINE THORAX UPPER
EXTREMITIES EXTREMITIES

+ Additional input: AQDS reference:


Examinations -Print mode -Print Marker
-RGDV type -Print Label
ABDOMEN -HCU scale -HCU Position
GALLBLADDER -Mirror
KIDNEY routine URINARY
BLADDER
+ -View Position
-Patient Orientation
ABDOMEN Children
AQDSs -Routine

Abdomen ap (L)
Abdomen lat
(L) Abdomen decub
(RLD) Abdomen ap decub + Additional input:
-Postmethod
(LLD) Adomen upright -Organ
Colon ap -Reference Plane
-Default Grid
APRs (Generator)
abdomen abdomen abd.ap abd.ap abd.ap
colon_ap
_ap _lat decub decub upright

- KV
- mAs
Generator - Filter
- RGDV
etc.... G:\Innovatn\Digital Diagnost\DOKU\ServiceTool\zeichnungen\GROUPS&C.A

Figure 2-23, Anatomical DB structure

The ADB tool covers the set-up of :

1. Exposures: Anatomical Group Æ Examination Æ AQDS Æ APRs Æ Generator pre-sets


2. Dicom Mapping: DICOM BWLM mapping (DICOM RIS translations)
3. RIS/HIS: RIS/RIS translations (BWLM & Conventional) & ASCII-RIS/HIS set-up
4. SYSTEM: System, general overview

Changes within the screens can be made as a selection out of different pre-defined lists or can be free text.
Some field can only display with no modifications possible,
Changes in the Examinations can be made in the selected Examination screen but also in the Anatomical
Group screen. This will change all Examination within that Anatomical Group. (Use the Examination table)
Changes in the AQDSs can be made in the selected Acquisition Set-up screen for every single AQDS, but also
in the Examination screen for all linked AQDSs (Use the AQDS table).

2.2.1 General handling advices

All manual inputs via the keyboard must be completed with: return or enter !!

Linked Examinations or AQDSs can not be deleted until they are un-linked.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-35


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.2.2 TREE structure & handling

The Anatomical database is now harmonized with other Philips modalities (e.g. PCR Eleva).
On the left side the “navigation” tree to select the different items to be shown/modified.
The tree structure is known from 1.4.x:
Anatomical Group Æ Examination Æ AQDS Æ APRs Æ Generator pre-sets
Root
Examination

AQDSs
APRs

Anatomic
al Groups

Search within the TREE:

1 Expand Selection (Right mouse click on “ROOT”).


2 Cntrl & I (this opens a search line).
3 Enter the string to search for & return.

RIGHT mouse click Æ Show References:

Drag & drop in the TREE:

Left mouse button:

Move dragged item to another group:


¾ Move Examination to another Anatomical Group
¾ Move AQDS to another Examination or to the group: Unlinked Exams

3-36 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Cntr & Left mouse button

Copy dragged item to another group:


¾ Copy Examination to another Anatomical Group.
¾ Copy AQDS to another Examination.

2.2.2.1 Table area

2.2.2.1.1 Description of used icons

Not linked (i.e. RIS code).


Linked.
RIS code linked to an Examinations.
No RIS code linked to the Examination.
Import / Query button (RIS/BWLM)
Un-linked ( e.g. Examination).

AQDS used in two Examinations


Examination (manually) linked to an Anatomical Group /
No linked RIS code.

Examination (manually) linked to an Anatomical Group


DICOM RIS (BWLM) code linked.
(D = DICOM / A = ASCII Ris).

2.2.2.1.2 Column handling (table area)

Sorting ( not for all tables ):

In the table area the columns can be used for sorting. Simply click with the left mouse button on the column
header

Re-size a column ( not for all tables):

A column can be moved to another position within the table. Simply use the left mouse button to pick a
left/right border of the column.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-37


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.2.2.2 ROOT (Exposure)

In the root level the different set-ups can be viewed or modified in a tabular version.

ROOT Æ AQDS:

Figure 2-24, Root AcquisitionSetups

Special function: Replace Postmethods

Figure 2-25, Replace Post Method

3-38 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

ROOT Æ Exposure Æ Examinations:

Figure 2-26, ROOT: Examinations

ROOT Æ Exposure Æ DICOMPatientOrientation:

Figure 2-27, ROOT: DICOMPatientOrientation

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-39


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.2.2.3 Exposure Æ Anatomical Group

This list shows the linked Examinations below the selected Anatomical group.

RIS code
DICOM
(BWLM)

No RIS code
mapped

Linked to an
Anatomical
Group

Figure 2-29, Anatomical Groups Screen

Set-Up items Default Selection Remarks


Description No change
Set-Up ID No change
RGDV type No change
DICOM Print
Auto Print 9 (active) 9/-
Scale - Life/large/medium/sm
all
Film Size - Selected from the
pre-defined film sizes
Layout - Selected from the
pre-defined layout list
Storage Types
DICOM post Post Post/pre DICOM storage as post image
Optical Disk post -- Post/pre OD storage as post image
Optical Disc pre -- Post/pre OD storage as pre image

Table 1, Anatomical Groups Table

3-40 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.2.2.4 Exposure Æ Anatomical Group Æ Examination

Figure 2-30, Examination Set-Up Screen

Set-Up items Default Selection Remarks


Description -- -- Free text
Set-Up ID -- -- --
RGDV type No change
DICOM PRINT:
Auto Print Yes/no
Scale life/large/medium/small
Layout div.
Film Size div.
Storage Types
DICOM post Post Post/pre DICOM storage as post image
Storage Medium pre -- local storage as pre image
Storage Medium post -- local storage as post image

Table 2, Examination Setup Table

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-41


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

ADD / Delete Acquisition

The button “Add Acquisition (s)” opens the screen below. Select the required AQDS and press “Apply”.
Press “ Delete Acquisition” to delete an AQDS from the examination list.

Figure 2-31, Add Acquisition

3-42 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.2.2.5 Exposure Æ Anatomical Group Æ Examination Æ Acquisition

Figure 2-32, AQDS Set-Up

Set-Up items Default Selection Remarks


Description -- -- Free text
Set-Up ID -- --
Post Method
Post Methods Name From the
postmethod list list
Category Unique Classic/UNIQUE
DICOM Organ
APR
APR Description -- From the synchr.
APR list.
RGDV selection -- (no modification Æ defined by the APR)
Amplimat Orientation 0
Reference Plane - Detector/Table
Default Grid AQDS related 9/- NOTE:
Check: GridWarning : YES
(Unstruc. Items: Group User Interface)
Beam Alignment none None/upper/lower
Rotation - (No) 9/-
Preset Collimator AQDS related 0-430 mm (X/Y in mm) Note: With stitching it can be higher.
Stitching Mode (Yes/No) - (No) 9/-

Figure 2-33, AQDS items

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-43


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

AQDS Reference (table) The table can be modified. The selections are taken
from a pop-up list.
PRINT:
Print Marker Free text
Print Label Selection from a list
(HCU) Position 1 –13 , none
DICOM:
DICOM View Position (0018 / 5101)
DICOM Patient Orientation (0020 / 0020)
DICOM Laterality (0020 / 0060)
Routine 9/- Highlighted within the Examination
Mirror 9/-

Table 3, AQDS Reference-Table

2.2.2.6 How to create a new Examination (new APR new AQDS new EXAMINATION)

Create Anatomical
Group

Link Examination

Link / Add AQDS

Link APR

2.2.2.7 DICOM Mapping

Also refer to separate section: DICOM

3-44 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.2.2.8 RIS / HIS (Translations)

Also refer to separate section : DICOM & ASCII RIS

The RIS/HISTab covers the setting of:

RIS Translations :
The mapping of internal DIDI database elements with “external attributes” sent by the RIS / BWLM
system.

Merge Items:
The definition of items which used to merge an patient-examination to an existing patient entry in the
patient list.

External
Attributes

MERGE Items.

DIDI database
elements.

Deletes an attribute
from the selected
RIS item.

ADD a new RIS Delete the selected ADD an attribute to Saves NO


translation to RIS translation from the the selected RIS the change
the list list. item. changes

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-45


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.2.2.9 System Info Screen

The system screen gives an overview about:

¾ General System INFO


¾ Site INFO
¾ Systems Options
¾ Licenses
¾ Setting of Unstructured Items

Figure 2-34, System Info Screen

3-46 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.2.3 Classic RIS set-up

2.2.3.1 Activate Classic RIS: Customization Manager

Activate
Conventional
RIS
No Licenses
for BWLM &
MPPS

If required,
activate
Backannotation.

Activate FTP or
NFS

Figure 2-35, CM Manager (Classic RIS)

2.2.3.2 Use the ADB tool to create & map RIS procedure codes:

RIS
Proc.Codes ALL available
linked to that procedure
Examination codes.

This code is
not linked

Figure 2-36, ADB RIS/HIS

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-47


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Press:
fill in a new code:

Press:
Select the procedure code you want to map and the
Examination which should be linked.

Select the Examination from the pop-up list :

The mapping is now completed. Make sure to click “Apply” to save the settings:

3-48 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.2.3.3 RIS Translations

The RIS translation tool links the external RIS attributes (from the RIS system) to a DIDI database element.
In addition the merge items are defined.
Merge items are responsible to add a new Examination scheduled for an existing patient into the patient list
correctly.

External
Attributes

MERGE Items.

DIDI database
elements.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-49


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.2.3.4 RIS Back Annotation

The RIS Back Annotation is used to back-report i.e. examination/acquisition/patient data to the RIS system via
the HIS_OUT directory.

How to create a new RIS Back Annotation:

Click on:

Enter the new external attribute.


Select the database source.
Click on: Source

Map the external attribute to the DIDI


database element (attribute):
Figure 2-37, RIS Backannotation Click on: Attribute

3-50 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.2.4 HCU (Printer) Configuration

Refer to separate section: DICOM Print

2.3 APR Update

The APR update tool synchronizes APR data from the DigitalDiagnost database with the related APR data set
of the Optimus generator. Refer to the detailed description of this tool in the section “Adjustments”.

NOTE:
When saving to DB it
could happen that a
message appears telling
that the “testAPR” is not
used.
Ignore this message. The
testAPR is a simple place-
holder in the OPTIMUS
generator.
Its always there but
usually not visible. You
cannot see it via the APR
Manager !

Figure 2-38, APR Up-Date Tool

Buttons & Fields

Make sure the generator is switched on.

After the update process ended successfully Save to DB must be


Save to DB clicked to store the modified data.

This starts the update procedure. Make sure all units are
Start switched on. All CAN nodes must be active.

Stop This interrupts the procedure.

Show Registration Devices This show shows the connected (activated) RGDVs 1-Table / 2-
Tomo / 3-Wall / 4-Free / 6-Free

EXIT Exit leaves the tool. If the update has not already been saved to
DB a message pops-up.

This shows the current APR to be processed. For every RGDV a


APR count sequence of 1044 numbers runs through. The required APRs are
linked automatically to the selected RGDV.

Registration Devices Displays the currently processed RGDV

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-51


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.4 DICOM Export Filter

Refer to separate section: DICOM

Refer to the section DICOM and to the UNIT manual DICOM for details of the DICOM Export Filter set-up.

2.5 Display Calibration


This set-up is used to calibrate the DIDI monitor based on the users basis monitor settings at light situation in
the room.
The procedure is described in the section: Adjustments (part of this manual)

2.6 Wallstand Display Update

This procedure performs an upload of an ASCII dataset to the optional Wall Stand Display. This display is
connected via the IRA interface board in the wall stand.

Make sure the display is connected, the system is switched ON completely before starting this process.
It will take some minutes and usually ends with a “success” indication message.
If no Wall Stand Display is connected this process can be started…but will be cancelled after some minutes.

This procedure is only required to be performed ONCE after the installation of the display.
With a new system it is already done in the factory !

The Wall Stand Display only works with DigitalDiagnost Release ≥1.3 and IR CAN BOARD level ≥.3 with
FW ≥2.1 . (1.3.1: IR Can 2.2)

2.7 PCR Reader MUTL (only for COMPANO)

In addition to the workflow using the digital detector it is now possible to integrate images from the directly
connected Compano Reader into the image pool. The PCR plates are identified by the connected barcode
reader and linked to the current patient. The patient list can show images from the DiDi detector AND the PCR
plates.

This MUTL tool is a 1:1 implementation of the tool used for standard PCR systems.

Refer to the separate UNIT Manual PCR Reader Integration.

3-52 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

2.8 Backup & Restore

2.8.1 Preparation:

1. Insert the BACKUP DOR / CD-R


2. Mount the DOR/CD-R (Status Bar Æ External Device Æ Load).
3. Enter the Service Tool: Select Set-Up Æ ConfigurationÆ

2.8.2 Backup

1. Insert and mount/load


Backup-DOR / CD-R
(External Device)

2. Service Tool Æ Set-Up Æ

Backup/Restore

3. Select “Backup”
4. Select target:
MOD/CDR
TRANSFER (directory)
TRANSFER with calibration data
Store for offline configuration

5. Click on “Store” to proceed


6. When completed
successfully click on “Exit” and
take out the medium.

U10 DOR: If the DOR is not


formatted use the “format” button to
do so. If the DOR is full, the system
will give a message.

To delete “OLD” backups completely


it is required to format the DOR.
Make sure the latest backup is kept
on another DOR or on the other side
of the DOR.

Blade 2500: CD-R cannot be re-


written. Backups can be added
(multisession). No formatting is
required!

NOTE:
The BACKUP description is fixed
and cannot be modified.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-53


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

2.8.3 Restore

1. Insert :
Backup-DOR / CD-R

2. Select:
Service Tool Æ Set-Up Æ

Backup/Restore

3. Select: “Restore”
4. Select the latest
“BACKUP” file
5. Select: Groups for restore

6. Click on: “Restore” to


proceed
7. When completed
successfully click on “Exit”
and take out the medium.

NOTE:

Dependant on the USER


login-level not ALL items
can be restored.

The user: SERVICE can


restore every items !

NOTE:
Use the “right” mouse button
to select “ALL”.
The RESTORE process will scan all available devices:

¾ CDROM / MOD
¾ TRANSFER directory
¾ USB stick

Every restore process automatically sets a “Recovery Point” and reverts to it when the restore did NOT
complete successfully.

This RESTORE process is limited to 4 times and then requires to manually setting a new Master Recovery
Point.

3-54 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

• Examinations
• Acquisition Setups
EXAMINATIONS • Anatomical Groups
• Procedure Codes
• DICOM Patient Orientation
• Factory PostMethods
• Patient Format
PATIENT_INFO • Sort Criteria
• Patients Database
• Unstructured Items excl. security.
UNSTRUCTURED • Site Information

DICOM_NODES • DICOM Nodes


(if applicable) DICOM Store, MPPS &-BWLM

RIS_HIS • RIS/HIS Translations


(if applicable)

RIS_BACK • RIS Backannotation


(if applicable)
• Mapping for DICOM element “sex” & “pregnancy status”
VOCAB
• DICOM translations

POSTMETHODS • Customer specific post methods

SERVICE&CALIBRATION • Calibration files & Calibration results

APC • APC= Advanced Print Component


Æ Dicom Print & Print Editor

AUDIT • Audit trail settings

USIT • USIT mount point

SECURITY • UnstructuredItems--> General-->Security

USERAUTH • User authentification settings / Login & User set-ups.

QUALITYASSURANCE • Quality assurance Reject Analysis

Table 4,Restore Items

NOTE
APC is not the former EV Print (ex. Advanced Print!).
This Backup item saves settings of the DICOM Print Tool.

2.8.3.1 Set Master Recovery Point (manually)

“Set Recovery
Point”:
Stores all systems
settings internally at
that moment.
“Revert to Recovery
Point”
Starts the system at
the last “Recovery
Point.”
Only ONE Recovery

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-55


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Point can be set.


A NEW RP
overwrites the
previous!

2.8.3.2 Too many restores

If more than 4 restores are performed an error message is shown to set a new recovery point before the
restore can be started. ( Check Point = Recovery Point ).

Select “ Set Recovery Point “ and after the process is finished the restore can be started.

The “number if attempted restores since last recovery” is set to “ 0 “.

3-56 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

3 Diagnostics

3.1 Detector

The Detector Diagnostic Tool is designed to check the basic functionality of the detector. A quick self-test is
implemented. The results are displayed in the same screen. In combination with the detector simulation box
and the acceptance tool it can be determined if the detector is defective or not. Detector “inside”
Temperature
Select here the ~ 35-50 °C
wanted Detector: indicates working
Table / Wall. condition.

Figure 3-1, Detector Diagnostics Tool


Detector
self tests

NOTE
Due to changes of the inner assembly of the detector, the temperature sensor is placed on a different
position. Therefore some newer detectors indicate a lower working temperature of about 35-45 °C
instead of 40-50 °C.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-57


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

3.2 CAN Monitor


The CAN Monitor Screen is used to view lists of CAN Objects (COBs) that have occurred within the CAN
Network. When the screen is first opened the ”CMS Object List” field displays all COB definitions either
completely highlighted or only ”none-or-more”. The last type of display is a result of clicking the ”Save As
Default” button when none or only some of the items were highlighted before the screen was exited.
The ”Log Messages” field displays all current log messages as they are generated. This display is stopped
(”frozen”) or started (”un-frozen”) by clicking the ”Sample” button.
To adjust the field size (in a vertical direction) there are two (2) ”buttons” at the right-edge of the screen. With
the cursor positioned over one of the ”buttons”, the mouse can be used to move the ”button” up / down the
screen. Only the fields immediately above and below the ”button” are adjusted.

Figure 3-2, CAN Monitor

Figure 3-3, CAN Monitor Plot

3-58 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

3.2.1 Remote (CAN) Node List

Figure 3-4, Remote (CAN) Node List (example)

CAN Nodes 1.5

CAN Node Notes


RADDIBU Workstation
RADCtl1 Bucky Controller
RADCtl2 Bucky Controller 2 (second tube)
XRG_OPT Generator
CSU_HD1 Control Handle
CSU_HD2 Control Handle 2 (second tube)
SLSCSD1 (TRACKING Option) Tracking Drive 1
SLSCSD2 (TRACKING Option) Tracking Drive 2 (second tube)
BLD1DV1 Collimator Æ NICOL
BLD2DV1 Collimator Æ NICOL (second tube)
TomoDv1 (TOMO Option) Tomo longitudinal Drive
AlphDv1 (TOMO Option) Tomo Alpha Drive
TrayDv1 (TOMO Option Tomo Bucky Tray Drive
RAD1RCP Remote Control Interface
(BLD2SEG) (only Collimator Galileo)
WSFOMst VM / VS Wall stand Controller (vertical = master)
WSFOSv1 VM / VS Wall stand Controller (tilt arm)
WSFOSv2 VM Wall stand Controller (hor. movement)
FROCtl Remote Control Controller
BUFCtl BUF Controller (BuckyUnit)

Within this second screen it is possible to view more than one Plot at a time either ”one-above-each-other”
(”Stack”) or ”one-on-top-of-each-other” (”Overlap”). When a Plot is or several Plots are displayed, the area
that can be viewed can be adjusted so that either a small area or a large area (of the Plot) can be viewed.
It is also possible to view the Plot(s) with relation to time (”Actual”) or equally spaced as each one occurs
(”Event”).
NOTE
With ”Event” the equal spacing does not give any indication of time relative to an occurrence.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-59


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Buttons & Fields


The various fields that are displayed in the screen are described in brief below.

Remote Node List This field displays the current status of the various nodes connected to
the CAN Network. As the status of the CAN Network changes this list is
updated.
The 7 headings to the field have these meanings:

Name This is the name of the connected node.


Id This is the Node Identification (ID).
Cl This is the Network Class.
State This is the availability state of the node.
Guard This is the time (in milliseconds) of how often the connected node is
checked to see if it still operates.
Life This is the time (in milliseconds) of how long the system waits for a
response from the connected node. When this time is exceeded the
system considers the connected node to be at fault and displays an
error message.
Error This the error message that is related to the connected node.
Either why it did not respond to the Guard inquiry or because it did not
respond to the Guard inquiry.

Distributor Master List This field displays the current status of the various COBs used on the
CAN Network. As the status of the CAN Network changes this list is
updated.
The 5 headings have these meanings:

Name This is the name of the COB.


Id This is the COB Identification (ID).
Cl This is the COB Class. It relates the number of remote receivers and
remote transmitters for a COB.
State This is the actual state of the COB in the network.
Len This is the length of each piece of Data in the COB.

CMS Object List This field displays the current status of the various COBs connected to
the CAN Network. If the number of nodes changes this list is updated.
The five (5) headings have these meanings:

Name This is the name of the connected COB.


Type This is the Object type.
User Type This is the user type of the COB.
Priority This is the priority of the COB. A priority of ”0” is the HIGHEST priority.
A priority of ”7” is the LOWEST priority.
Access This is the type of access.
I.e.: ”Read Only”, ”Write Only” or ”Read / Write”.
VarTypes This is the Type of transmitted data.
Log Messages This field displays the Log messages associated with selected Items in
the CMS Object List. Refer to Section CAN as a part of this chapter.

3-60 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

The list on previous page is a brief description of the operation of each button that is used either for the control
of the screen or for the selection of entries or “pop-up” screens:

Name Description
Exit When clicked this closes the CAN Monitor Screen and return to the
DigitalDiagnost Service Tool screen.
RESET When clicked this resets the CAN Monitor to a ”zero” point ready for the
next set of Events to occur. This permits an observation to be made of
how a part of the CAN Network operates.
Sample When clicked this selection button stops (”freeze”) / start (”un-free”) the
sampling of the selected COBs.
Plot When clicked this causes the ”Plot” screen to be displayed.
Select All When clicked this causes all Items in the CMS Object List to be
highlighted (i.e.: Selected). These is displayed in the ”Log Messages”
field.
Unselect All When clicked this causes all Items in the CMS Object List to have the
highlight removed (i.e.: Un-selected). This disables the display of all
new messages. Existing messages are NOT removed from the display.

Save As Default When clicked this causes the system to ”remember” the Items to be
highlighted. When the screen is opened the next time ONLY the Items
at ”Exit” highlight.

Buttons & Fields ”Plot” Screen

The various fields that are displayed in the screen are described below:
Name Description
Start X A value that is input here determines where the Plot starts in the ”X”
direction when ”Fixed Intervals:” is selected.
End X A value that is input here determines where the Plot ends in the ”X”
direction when ”Fixed Intervals:” is selected.
Length A value that is input here determine how long the Plot can be in (in
milliseconds) the ”X” direction when ”Dynamic:” is selected.
Start Y A value that is input here determines where the Plot starts in the ”Y”
direction.
End Y A value that is input here determines where the Plot ends in the ”Y”
direction.
Plot Width A value that is input here determines how wide the Plot is in the ”X”
direction.
Plot Height A value that is input here determines how high the Plot is in the ”Y”
direction.
”Top-right-of-the-screen” This lists all COBs for which there is data available. To enable a Plot to
be generated and displayed in the ”Lower-part-of-the-screen” one or
more of the COBs must be highlighted (selected).
”Lower-part-of-the-screen” Any COB that is highlighted in the ”Top-right-of-the-screen” is
displayed in this part of the screen.

Listed below is a brief description of the operation of each button that is used either for the control of the
screen or for the selection of entries or ”pop-up” screens:

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-61


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Name Description
Stack When the button is clicked the displays of the Plots (in the lower part of
the screen) is ”one-above-the-other” (i.e.: Each Plot is displayed
separately, each with their own information).
Overlap When the button is clicked the displays of the Plots (in the lower part of
the screen) is ”one-on-top-of-each-other”. Only one Plot appears to be
displayed but the information for all selected Plots are available.
Actual When clicked this causes the Plots to be displayed (changed) as time
progresses, even when there may be no event.
Event When clicked this causes the Plots to be displayed (changed) only when
an event occurs. The displayed distance between each event is always
equal even when the time between each event is different.
Fixed Interval When clicked this allows a ”zoom” function to be used for an area of the
displayed Plot. The size of the area to be viewed (zoomed into) is
adjustable by the input of values in the four fields:
Start X:
End X:
Start Y:
End Y:

Dynamic When clicked this allows a series of COBs to be displayed as they


occur. The time span for the display is determined by the value input in
the field ”Length:”.
Print When clicked this creates a PostScript file for each displayed Plot. The
filename end is ”.ps” for ALL files and can be found in the directory
”/export/home/SABRE/bin”.

When the view is ”Stack” there is a PostScript file for each Plot in the stack, with a filename that
matches the COB ”name” of the Plot.
When the view is ”Overlap” there is only ONE PostScript file. The filename is ALWAYS ”plot.ps”.

Exit When clicked this screen closes and the ”CAN Monitor” screen
displays.

3-62 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

3.3 System Control Monitor

The System Control Monitor Screen is used to view the various State Controllers within the System Controller.
There is a display of on-line information about the System Controller Status and the System Control Monitor
History. The ”History” field shows the transition from one state to the next.
It is possible to use one of the procedures listed below to access the information in the Log files:

See ALL ”Events” / ”Transitions” / ”Exceptions” for the Sysctrl.


See selected (i.e. : Filtered) ”Events” / ”Transitions” / ”Exceptions” for the Sysctrl.
Display a ”Plot” of selected ”Events” / ”Transitions” / ”Exceptions”.
Print (to a PostScript file) the display shown in the ”Plot” screen.

Figure 3-5, System Control Monitor

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-63


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

State Machines

The State Machine names used for the above fields cover these areas :

VoyReady CTRL Detector


Exposure CTRL OPTIMUS Generator
Router The link between the CAN and the SUN Applications
Geometry CTRL Bucky Controller

Buttons & Fields ”Plot” Screen

Figure 3-6, System Controller Plot Screen

The various fields that are displayed in the screen are described below:

Name Description
Start X: A value that is input here determines where the Plot starts in the ”X”
direction when ”Fixed Intervals:” is selected.
End X: A value that is input here determines where the Plot ends in the ”X”
direction when ”Fixed Intervals:” is selected.
Length: A value that is input here determines how long the Plot can be in (in
milliseconds) the ”X” direction when ”Dynamic:” is selected.
Start Y: A value that is input here determines where the Plot starts in the ”Y”
direction.
End Y: A value that is input here determines where the Plot ends in the ”Y”
direction.
Plot Width: A value that is input here determines how wide the Plot is in the ”X”
direction.
Plot Height: A value that is input here determines how high the Plot is in the ”Y”
direction.

3-64 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

This lists all COBs for which there is data available. To enable a Plot to
1 be generated and displayed one or more of the COBs must be
highlighted (selected).
Any COB that is highlighted is diplayed.
2

Buttons - Description ”Plot” Screen

Listed below is a brief description of the operation of each button that is used either for the control of the
screen or for the selection of entries or ”pop-up” screens:
Name Description
Stack When the button is clicked the displays of the Plots (in the lower part of
the screen) are ”one-above-the-other” (i.e.: Each Plot displays
separately, each with its own information).
Overlap When the button is clicked the displays of the Plots (in the lower part of
the screen) are ”one-on-top-of-each-other”. Only one Plot appears to be
displayed but the information for all selected Plots is available.
Actual When clicked this causes the Plots to be displayed (changed) as time
progresses, even when there may be no event.
Event When clicked this causes the Plots to be displayed (changed) only when
an event occurs. The displayed distance between each event is always
equal even when the time between each event is different.
Fixed Interval When clicked this allows a ”zoom” function to be used for an area of the
displayed Plot. The size of the area to be viewed (zoomed into) is
adjustable by the input of values in the four fields:
Start X:
End X:
Start Y:
End Y:

Dynamic When clicked this allows a series of COBs to be displayed as they


occur. The time span for the display is determined by the value input in
the field ”Length:”.
Print When clicked this creates a PostScript file for each displayed Plot. The
filename end is ”.ps” for ALL files and can be found in the directory
”/export/home/SABRE/bin”.

When the view is ”Stack” there is a PostScript file for each Plot in the stack, with a filename that
matches the COB ”name” of the Plot.
When the view is ”Overlap” there is only ONE PostScript file. The filename is ALWAYS ”plot.ps”.

Exit When clicked, this screen closes and the ”CAN Monitor” screen
displays.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-65


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

3.3.1 Firmware Config (Release 1.4 / 1.4.1 / 1.5)

Figure 3-7, FW configuration (screen)

Controller: Version Version Version


with 1.4 with 1.4.1 with 1.5
BUCO 9.1 9.2 11.1
CeilingCAN 1.5 1.5 1.5
CeilingMot 1.5 1.5 1.5
CtrlHandle 3.3 3.3 3.4
RemoteCtrl (VS/VM) 1.0 1.1 1.1
RemoteCtrlHW (VS/VM) 1.0 1.0 1.1
CollNicol 1.2 1.2 1.2
Generator 3.6 3.6 3.7
WallMaster (VP1) 1.0 1.1.0
WallMasterHW (VP1) - -
WallSlave (VP1) 1.0 1.1.0
WallSlaveHW (VP2) - -
Wall/TABLE BUF 1.0 1.1.0 2.2
Wall/TABLE BUF_HW 1.1
VM/VS SW 2.0
VM/VS HW 1.0

3-66 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

3.3.2 Usage of CAN or System Control Monitor during Examination mode

Due to the fact that both, the Can Monitor (CalMon) and the System Control Monitor (SysMon) cannot be
started while the System is in examination mode (ready for X-Ray) a special procedure must be used:

1. Enter the Service Tool: Open a Command Tool (button).


2. Move the Command Tool window with the mouse to the lower left corner of the screen until the top
border covers half the height of the status bar.
3. Exit the Service Tool.
4. In the Patient List: select a patient.
5. Click on: Start Examination.
6. The Command Tool is still available in front of the status bar. It can be activated with a click on the
outer border of the window.

In the Command Tool the CAN-Monitor or the System Control Monitor can be started:

CAN Monitor: : xcalmon <return>

System Control Monitor : xsysmon <return>

After the session is finished exit all tools shutdown and restart the system.

3.4 Ethereal (Network Tool)

This could be a helpful tool to be used for network diagnostics. It is the same tool as implemented on some
Service PCs.

We do not describe this tool here. A detailed manual can be downloaded from the internet:

http://www.ethereal.com/download.html

http://ethereal.mirroring.de/docs/

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-67


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4 Acceptance

The Image Quality Tool (IQ) is a combination of a calibration Tool and Test (Acceptance) Tool. It is usable in
case of Image Quality problems (fault finding) and during preventive maintenance or for System Installation.
The tests are producing results in form of an image or numeric. The numeric values are stored in the Result
tool. Important results can be write protected so that “housekeeping” does not delete the data.
All Tests including the calibrations are performed partly without or with X-Ray. The X-Ray tests have to be
activated by using the hand-switch. All other tests are performed automatically. Some tests require special
test-objects. Refer to the related section to check for the correct positioning.

CAUTION:

Never cancel a test or calibration sequence until it is finished.


Never EXIT the tool until the calibration and/or tests are not finished. Check the Process Control window in
the Status Bar to make sure that no images are in the process-queue.

Figure 4-1, Image Quality Tool (Acceptance)

NOTE
All tests are based on a performed calibration (Pixel & Gain). For reliable results of all tests, perform
the calibrations first.

3-68 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Some available tests are for different usage:

1. Factory (NOT for Service)


2. Customer (a sub-set of calibration and test items -> Quality Assurance (QA) )
3. Installation
4. Detector Exchange
5. General field usage ( faultfinding / preventive & corrective maintenance)

Meaning of the short-cuts:


X = X-Ray required
R = Results
S = Screen Diagnosis
AL = 21mm Aluminum
P = Printing possible
G = GRID

NOTE
All tests / calibrations are made with an SID of 110cm (Table) 150cm (Wall) with CS 2/4

Special for FS fix (Wallstand):


Fixed SID within a range of 170-210 / 210-260 cm
Make sure the correct Generator APR file is loaded for fixed SID !!
APRs: dd18xxx.tdl / dd22xxx.tdl

Underlined Items can be accessed with Quality Assurance (Customer).

Offset calibration NO X-RAY (Dark Images)

Gain calibration 10X, AL, R, no GRID

Pixel calibration 12X, AL, R, no GRID

Tomo Offset calibration NO X-RAY (Dark Images)

Tomo Gain calibration 10X, AL, R, no GRID

Tomo Pixel calibration 10X, AL, R, no GRID

Dose Field Flatness 2X, AL, R, no GRID

Electronic Noise NO X-RAY (Dark Image)

Mains Hum NO X-RAY (Dark Image)

Linearity 3X, AL, R, no GRID

PCR Calibration/Homogeneity Calibration: 1X,AL GRID? : PCR70KV


Homgeneity: 1X, no AL, GRID? : PCR80KV

Grid Delay Time 1X, AL, R, S, GRID

X-Ray Area 1X, S, P, no GRID

Amplimat Dose Adjustment 3X, AL, GRID


dose measurement with dose meter

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-69


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Amplimat Field Adjustment 3X, AL, GRID (check mAs on the Optimus display)

Constancy X, AL, GRID

Universal Test Object X, Multi purpose usage

Visual Erasure Test X, AL, GRID

Table 5, Available IQ-Tests / calibrations:

NOTE
The calibration-procedures are also used to determine the quality of the detector. Every calibration is
completed with the quality indication. The result tool gives detailed information about the calibration
status.

Help Info Screen

Start Display of the


activated test
Exam

This list shows all


steps to be
preformed by this
test/calibration

Image Display
Compano: Window
Plate ID

RGDV status:
Æ Selected
Æ Available Back to Patient
List = ACC
Test list

Activate Processing
Status Window
Tools of the Verification Screen. Not to
be used here !!

Figure 4-2, General usage of the screen

3-70 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

4.1 Detector Working Conditions

SID: 110cm for all tests (150cm for wall-detector)


X-Ray Beam alignment: focal point is located on the axis of the detector central axis
Range of temperature: 10 ... 30°C (Room)
Range of humidity: 20 ... 80% RH (Room)
Range of air pressure: 70 ... 110kPa (Room)
Range of detector (inside-)temperature: 35 ... 50°C (Refer to Detector Diagnostic Tool)
Let the Detector stabilize to a room specific temperature.

4.2 Detector calibration

NOTE

This section describes the Gain and Pixel calibration.


In addition every ~20 sec the Detector is “calibrated” automatically by acquiring a “DARK IMAGE”. This
calibration is used for the offset correction of every image.

4.2.1 Auto Pixel-Calibration

Starting with a complete calibration after system installation, the system (Pixel-) calibrates itself
automatically by using every examination.

Every 4-6 weeks it is only required to perform the Gain Calibration.

Restrictions for Autocalibration:

The Auto Pixel-Calibration is only valid for detector areas used for the examination/image process.
The full area of the detector must be exposed in a significant fraction of images to make ensure a sufficient
calibration. In some cases it could be necessary to re-calibrate the system manually (PIXEL & GAIN)

How to make sure the calibration is sufficient:

¾ If the image quality is degrading a full calibration must be performed

¾ In most cases only RGDV TOMO must be calibrated separately (only GAIN every 4-6 weeks)

¾ The status of the calibration is still indicated in the “System” window under “Last Calibration”.
If switched from “accepted” to “undefined” the calibration must be completed by re-calibrating the
detector (PIXEL & GAIN)

¾ The Calibration Timeout (Timer) can be set to any required interval.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-71


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.2.2 General Preparation

NOTE
Make sure no high dose X-Ray was taken before the calibration is started.
Wait about 20 minutes in this case.
Make sure the Detector has already reached working condition (stabilized temperature)

Usual preparations:

Æ A Grid is not used for every test.


Æ 21mm AL block (Test object) is not used for every test.
Æ SID table 110cm / wall stand (s) & VM 150cm (Special: Different fixed SIDs for DiDi with FS fix)
Æ No object in the X-Ray beam (VM: No table inbetween !)

TH: Make sure no aluminum border of the tabletop is in the beam!

Results / output:

All tests are producing an image. Relevant information is given in the Result Tool.
In most cases film diagnostics is only possible for experienced engineers.
Some tests are designed to be performed ONLY using the film (i.e. X-Ray Area) or the screen.

NOTEs:

Æ X-Ray has to be started by pressing the X-Ray button.


Æ No-X-ray is released automatically.
Æ Any un-complete or interrupted calibration must be repeated completely.
Æ In case of errors or other defects the calibration must be repeated completely.

The Image Quality Tool provides different calibrations:

1. Offset calibration / Tomo Offset calibration


This calibration is detector specific. If the Detector requires this calibration it stays active in the list. If it
is not required it disappears. Delete calibration makes this calibration available again. If one of two
Detectors needs this calibration, it stays in the list.
2. Gain calibration / Tomo Gain calibration
First part of the calibration procedure. Wait until processing is finished before starting the Pixel
calibration.
3. Pixel calibration / Tomo Pixel calibration
Second part to complete the Detector calibration.
4. PCR Calibration
If PCR is integrated (optional) into the DiDi system.
The PCR reader needs to be calibrated (Homogeneity / Sensitivity )

NOTE
If an initial calibration is required (i.e Detector Exchange):
Always perform Offset calibration, Gain calibration and Pixel calibration in one sequence.
Always start with the Offset / Gain calibration and wait until the processing is finished before the Pixel
calibration is started.

Even if no image quality problems are visible, the gain calibration(s) should be repeated every month.
If the IQ stabilizes this interval could be increased.
A separate pixel calibration is usually not required. Exception: Detector Exchange !

3-72 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

4.2.3 Offset calibration


This calibration produces the OFFSET image. The offset stability (no x-ray) is measured based on 5 dark
images at different points of time. This calibration looks for noticeable offset behavior of pixel or groups of
pixel.
NOTE
This calibration item is only available if it is required (automatically detected) .
For every first installation this calibration checks for an “Offset Detector”. If the calibrated Detector has
no offset behavior, this item is hidden after the next restart.
If “Clear calibration” for the required Detector is performed, this item comes back into the list.

Online help text:


This procedure generates 5 dark images

- select RGDV Table or Wall


- select OffsetIni to release the first dark image
- wait until all dark images have been released automatically (the cursor
reaches the last “Standby”)

4.2.4 Gain calibration


This calibration produces the GAIN image. This image includes the pixel behavior under different x-ray
conditions. This image is used for the calculation of every patient images.

Test sequence:
10 X-ray Gain images are
performed (to be started with the
X-Ray button).

Preparation:
21mm AL, No GRID, SID
110/150cm

Results / output:
Mainly in the Result Tool. Image
diagnostics is only possible for
experienced engineers.

Special for FS fix (Wallstand):

Fixed SID within a range of 170-210 / 210-260 cm


Make sure the correct Generator APR file is
loaded for fixed SID !!
APRs: dd18xxx.tdl / dd22xxx.tdl

Online help text Gain Calibration:


This procedure generates the gain image
- select RGDV Table or Wall
- SID = 110cm(Table), 150cm(Wall) with CS 2/4
- SID = fix with Tube Floor Stand
- 21mmAl prefiltration
- no grid
- release 10 X-Ray images, which will be confirmed automatically
- w a i t until a popup indicates success or failure

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-73


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.2.5 Pixel calibration


This calibration creates the pixel map, which analyses the behavior of each pixel under different x-ray
conditions to separate defective pixel or groups of pixel.

Also refer to: 4.2.1 Auto Pixel calibration.

Test sequence:
12 X-Ray images are performed
(to be started with the X-Ray
button).

Preparation:
21mm AL, No Grid,
SID=110/150cm

Results / output:
Mainly in the Result Tool. Image diagnostics
is only possible for experienced engineers.
Result Tool: Check the ECV value.

Special for FS fix (Wallstand):

Fixed SID within a range of 170-210 / 210-260 cm


Make sure the correct Generator APR file is
loaded for fixed SID !!
APRs: dd18xxx.tdl / dd22xxx.tdl

Online help text Pixel Calibration:

'This procedure generates the pixel map#


- select RGDV Table or Wall#
- SID = 110cm(Table), 150cm(Wall) with CS 2/4#
- SID = fix with Tube Floor Stand#
- 21mmAl prefiltration#
- no grid#
- release 12 X-Ray images, which will be confirmed automatically#
- w a i t until a popup indicates success or failure',

3-74 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

4.2.6 Tomo Offset calibration


This calibration produces the Tomo OFFSET image. The offset stability (no x-ray) is measured based on 5
dark images at different points of time. This calibration looks for noticeable offset behavior of pixel or groups of
pixel.

NOTE

This calibration item is only available if it is required . For every first installation this calibration checks
for an “Offset Detector”. If the calibrated Detector has no offset behavior, this item is hidden after the
next restart.
If “Clear calibration” for the required Detector is performed, this item comes back into the list.

Online help text Offset Calibration:


This procedure generates the TOMO offset image using dark images
- select RGDV Table
- select TomoOffsetIni to release the first dark image
- w a i t approx. 10 minutes until all images have been
a u t o m a t i c a l l y released and confirmed
and a popup indicates success or failure

4.2.7 Tomo Gain calibration


This calibration produces the Tomo GAIN image. This images includes the pixel behavior under different x-ray
conditions. This images is used for the calculation of every patient images.

Test sequence:
10 X-ray Gain images are performed
(to be started with the X-Ray
button).

Preparation:
21mm AL, No GRID, SID 110cm

Results / output:
Mainly in the Result Tool.
Image diagnostics is only possible for
experienced engineers.

NOTE

The Tomo Gain calibration result image looks similar to the standard Gain calibration result image.

Online help text Tomo Gain Calibration:

This procedure creates the TOMO gain image

- select RGDV Table


- 21mmAl filter - no grid - SID = 110cm
- release 10 X-Ray images, which will be confirmed automatically
- w a i t until a popup indicates success or failure

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-75


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.2.8 Tomo Pixel calibration


This calibration creates the Tomo PIXEL MAP which analyses the behavior of each pixel under different x-ray
conditions to separate defective pixel or groups of pixel.

Also refer to: 4.2.1 Auto Pixel Calibration.

Test sequence:
12 X-Ray images are performed (to
be started with the X-Ray button).

Preparation:
21mm AL, No GRID, SID 110/150cm

Results / output:
Mainly in the Result Tool. Image
diagnostics is only possible for
experienced engineers.
Result Tool: Check the ECV value.

Online help text Tomo Pixel Calibration:

This procedure creates the TOMO pixel map

- select RGDV Table


- 21mmAl filter - no grid - SID = 110cm
- release 10 X-Ray images, which will be confirmed automatically
- w a i t until a popup indicates success or failure

3-76 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

4.3 Acceptance Tests

4.3.1 Dose Field Flatness


Apply different dose but keep the spectrum (kV, filtering) constant. The homogeneity of the whole
image/Detector is measured with different doses.

Test sequence:
2 X-ray images are performed
(DoseFlat1 and 2. To be released
with the X-Ray button).

Preparation:
Select Table or Wall first!
21mm AL, No GRID, SID 110/150
cm

Results / output:
Mainly in the Result Tool. The
structure contrast value” is
calculated.
Image diagnostics is only possible
for experienced engineers. Usually
it is a homogenous image.

Special for FS fix (Wallstand):

Fixed SID within a range of 170-210 / 210-260 cm


Make sure the correct Generator APR file is loaded
for fixed SID !!
APRs: dd18xxx.tdl / dd22xxx.tdl

Online help text Dose Field Flatness:


This procedure evaluates the dose field flatness

- select RGDV Table or Wall


- SID = 110cm (table) / 150cm (wall) with CS 2/4
- SID = fix with Tube Floor Stand
- 21mmAl prefiltration
- no grid
- release and confirm 2 X-Ray images

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-77


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.3.2 Electronic Noise


The Electronic Noise is the variation of the line median value from line to line measured under dark image
conditions. The one dimensional noise can be measured by calculating the noise power spectrum (NPS).
Check the Result Tool for details. It is a kind of homogeneity check, which is performed in relation to all 4
panels. It is checking the performance of A/D converters and amplifiers.

Test sequence:
One dark image (Electronic Noise,
NO X-Ray). One Dark (blank) Image
be automatically retrieved from the
detector. (Click on ElectronicNoise
to start the test.)

Preparation:
No Test Objects required.

Results / output:
Mainly in the Result Tool.
Image diagnostics is only possible
for experienced engineers.

Online help text Electronic Noise:

This procedure evaluates the Noise Power Spectrum


out of one dark image

- select RGDV Table or Wall


- select “ElectronicNoise” from acquisitions
- the dark image will be released and confirmed automatically

3-78 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

4.3.3 Mains Hum


This test checks the quality (50 / 60 Hz hum) of the dc power supply. Refer to the Result Tool for details.
The result image shows periodical horizontal lines/stripes (fixed frequency) in case the mains hum is too high.
If this test fails the external power supply (Detector Interface Board +/- 5Vdc & 24V dc) might be defective. The
image below gives a slight idea of how the “normal” images shoild look like.

Test sequence:
One dark image (MainsHum, NO X-
Ray). One Dark Image be
automatically performed.
(Click on MainsHum to start the test.)

Preparation:
No Test Objects required.

Results / output:
Mainly in the Result Tool.
Image diagnostics is only possible
for experienced engineers.

Online help text mains Hum:


This procedure is used to analyze mains hum

- select MainsHum from acquisitions


- select RGDV Table or Wall
- the dark image will be released and confirmed automatically

Figure 4-3, Mains Hum Image

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-79


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.3.4 Linearity
This test has to be performed in relation to the Dose Field Flatness Test.
The linear behavior, if different dose levels are applied to the 4 panels is checked. The median pixel-value of
each quarter panel is calculated. The images usually show homogenous structures if things are OK.

Test sequence:
3 X-ray Gain images are performed
(Linearity 2, 1, and 3. To be started
with the X-Ray button).

Preparation:
21mm AL, No GRID, SID 110/150cm

Results / output:
Mainly in the Result Tool. Image
diagnostics is only possible for
experienced engineers.

Special for FS fix (Wallstand):

Fixed SID within a range of 170-210 / 210-260 cm


Make sure the correct Generator APR file is loaded for
fixed SID !!

APRs: dd18xxx.tdl / dd22xxx.tdl

Online help text:

This procedure analyses the linearity of the detector

- select RGDV Table or Wall


- SID = 110cm (table) / 150cm (wall) with CS 2/4
- SID = fix with Tube Floor Stand
- 21mmAl prefiltration
- no grid
- release and confirm 3 X-Ray images

3-80 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

4.3.5 PCR Calibration/Homogeneity

Test sequence:
Homogeneity:
1x X-RAY with PCR70KV
Calibration:
1x X-RAY with PCR80KV

Preparation:
21mm AL, SID near to 180cm
Collimation larger than
cassette

Results / output:
The results are printed into
the post image(s)

Online help text PCR Homogeneity:

This procedure tests uniformity of the image

- use largest PCR cassette size


- select free exposure
- link plate (with barcode reader)
- 25mmAl pre-filtration
- SID as close as possible to 180cm
- set the collimation field 3 cm larger than cassette size
- ensure that the green cassette label is facing the anode
- ensure that there are no objects in the beam (homogeneous exposure)
- release 1 exposure
- check the values displayed in the post image in relation to the limits
- for the limits refer to the image quality manual

Online help text PCR Calibration:

This procedure tests and calibrates sensitivity and shading (service only!)

- use largest PCR cassette size


- link plate (with barcode reader)
- no prefiltration
- SID as close as possible to 180cm
- set the collimation field 3 cm larger than cassette size
- ensure that the green cassette label is facing the anode
- ensure that there are no objects in the beam (homogeneous exposure)
- release 1 exposure
- wait 10 minutes before readout
- measure the dose under same conditions such as first exposure
- check the values displayed in the post image in relation to the limits
- for the limits refer to the service instructions

For more details please refer to the UNIT manual “PCR Reader Integration”.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-81


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.3.6 Grid Delay Time

This adjustment synchronizes the release of the grid with the correct X-Ray trigger.
For more information refer to Subsystem Manual DigitalDiagnost TH, section 6.

Test sequence:
2 X-ray image: 1 long one short

Preparation:
GRID, No 21mm AL, SID 110 / 150cm

Results / output:
Check the second image. The
center of the washer should be
aligned with the center of the
blurred washer line as shown in
the image below (within 0 – 2 mm)

Special for FS fix (Wallstand):

Fixed SID within a range of 170-210 / 210-260 cm


Make sure the correct Generator APR file is loaded
for fixed SID !!
APRs: dd18xxx.tdl / dd22xxx.tdl

Online Help text:


This procedure creates an image to check the grid delay time

- select RGDV Table or Wall


- NO PREFILTRATION
- SID = 110cm(Table), 150cm(Wall) with CS 2/4
- SID = fix with Tube Floor Stand
- fix a washer on the center of the grid (use adhesive tape)
- release and confirm 2 Xray-images
- evaluate the image using the viewer or the printer
- remove the washer from the grid

DoubleClick

Figure 4-4, Grid Delay Time image

3-82 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Figure 4-5, Grid Delay Time image (scale 1/2)

Use right mouse button to select scale ½. Between two lines: 1 cm .

DDF:
The two (additional) black lines mark the center of the washer and the center of the grid movement. They
should be aligned in an area of 0-2 mm. Refer to the SMI manual for details.

0-2 mm

BUF
The Grid delay time cannot be adjusted anymore BUT this is not required.
The system takes care the timing is correct. The test should show an image (that one with the washers), which
has a difference of about 4mm. The tolerance is 4 mm +/- 2mm

LEFT hand operation RIGHT hand operation

4 mm 4 mm

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-83


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.3.7 X-Ray Area


This tool is designed to check the X-ray field in relation to the expected field. Line 1 indicates the field the
system expects. Line 2/3 indicate the distance of 1cm from the expected area (line 1).

The result image can be used in addition to mechanically center Test sequence:
the table (parallel position to X-Ray field) and to align X-ray – light. 1 X-ray image
For more information refer to SMI DigitalDiagnost.
Preparation:
no GRID, no AL, SID 110 / 150cm

Results / output:
Check the image (as shown
below) for good center
alignment , parallelism and
size of the X-Ray field / table
or wall stand.

Special for FS fix (Wallstand):

Fixed SID within a range of 170-210 / 210-


260 cm
Make sure the correct Generator APR file is
loaded for fixed SID !!

APRs: dd18xxx.tdl / dd22xxx.tdl

Online help text:

This procedure creates an image to check


1) alignment of Xray field and detector
2) alignment of Xray/light field
- select RGDV Table or Wall
- no prefiltration - no grid
- SID = 110cm(Table), 150cm(Wall) with CS 2/4
- SID = fix with Tube Floor Stand
- place e.g. washers at the edges of the light field
- release and confirm an Xray-image
- evaluate the image using the viewer or the printer'

3-84 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Figure 4-6, X-Ray Area Image

Click RIGHT mouse


button. Select
Scale1/2 &
Magnify !

The the dottet lines mark the area in which the x-ray beam should be centered. The outer and inner line mark
an area of +/- 1 cm.
This image allows an easy alignment of size and position of the x-ray beam. Refer to the SMI for details.

With Scale ½ and magnification it is possible to see very detailed where the X-RAY area is situated.

NOTE
The image above shows a badly adjusted X-RAY area !!!

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-85


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.3.8 Amplimat Dose Adjustment


This test supports the dose adjustment in the Generator (Switch off dose). The adjustment is made via the
FSC-value (Optimus set-up) for each speed level (S200, S400, S800).

Test sequence:
3 X-Ray images with different dose
settings:
S200, S400, S800

Preparation:
GRID, 21mm AL, SID 110 / 150cm

Results / output:
Measure the switch off dose for
each setting. Adjust the Dose of
FSC in the Optimus generator
(XRG scope)

For more details refer to the SMI of


DigitalDiagnost.
___________________________________
Special for FS fix (Wallstand):

Fixed SID within a range of 170-210 / 210-260 cm


Make sure the correct Generator APR file is loaded
for fixed SID !!
APRs: dd18xxx.tdl / dd22xxx.tdl

Online help text:

This procedure is used to check the switch-off dose of the Amplimat

- select RGDV Table or Wall


- 21mmAl prefiltration#
- grid
- SID according to used grid
- SID = 110cm(Table), 150cm(Wall) with CS 2/4
- SID = fix with Tube Floor Stand
- release and confirm 3 Xray-images

Table 6, Grid Ranges (general)

Type: Max. ranges Ranges for adjustments


f0 = 180 : 36 / 12 140 - 250 cm 180 – 200 cm
f0 = 140 : 36 / 12 115 - 180 cm 150 cm
f0 = 140 : 36 / 8 105 – 210 cm 150 cm
f0 = 110 : 36 / 12 90 – 125 cm 100 – 110 cm
f0 = 110 : 36 / 8 80 – 130 cm 100 – 110 cm

For detailed information refer to SMI DigitalDiagnost, Section: Setting To Work: (“Switch-off-dose”).

3-86 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Exposure Index (EI)

In addition to the switch-off dose measured by an external dose-meter, the system automatically calculates the
EI (Exposure Index) for each exposure. This value is inversely proportional to the dose it is derived from the
histogram analysis. This value is displayed in the image and printed or sent with the image.
There are slight deviations for different kV-settings and filtration. (standard: 70KV, 21mm AL)

Definition: EI [µGy-1] = SENSITIVITY [LSB / µGy] RQA * 1000 / 10Keyvalue [LSB]

Key value:
This is a calculated value based on a histogram analysis and is dependant on the detector-
dose. (In the image header this is the key-center value.)

Sensitivity:
Detector signal (LSB) / Dose [µGy]

Detector signal Exposure Index Dose [µGy] Dose [mR]


[LSB] EI
R‘10 scale =100 / EI (RQA5) =dose [µGy] / 8.87
(RQA5)
2070 100 10,0 1,13
1656 125 8,0 0,90
1294 160 6,3 0,70
1035 200 5,0 0,56
828 250 4,0 0,45
647 320 3,1 0,35
518 400 2,5 0,28
414 500 2,0 0,23
329 630 1,6 0,18
259 800 1,25 0,14

Table 7, Relation between EI, Dose and Film speed (RQA5)

The Exposure Index (EI) represents the film blackening (density) in the digital imaging world.

NOTE
The EI value may vary in-between the next or the previous limit-step.
I.e.: The EI of 400 could vary in-between 320 and 500.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-87


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.3.9 Amplimat Field Test

This test supports to check the switch OFF dose deviation between the Amplimat fields.
Check the mAs display on the generator desk.

Test sequence:
3/5 X-Ray images are performed.
One for each field.
(To be released with the X-Ray
button.)
Use the mAs reading on the
Display to check the values.

Preparation:
GRID, 21mm AL, SID 110/150 cm

___________________________________
Special for FS fix (Wallstand):

Fixed SID within a range of 170-210 / 210-260 cm


Make sure the correct Generator APR file is
loaded for fixed SID !!

APRs: dd18xxx.tdl / dd22xxx.tdl

NOTE

The three chambers cannot be adjusted in relation to each other.

Online help text:


This procedure takes acquisitions to compare mAs of the 3/5 Amplimat
fields

- select RGDV Table or Wall


- 21mmAl prefiltration
- grid
- SID according to used grid
- SID = 110cm(Table), 150cm(Wall) with CS 2/4
- SID = fix with Tube Floor Stand
- release and confirm 3/5 Xray-images

For more information refer to SMI DigitalDiagnost.

3-88 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

4.3.10 Constancy
This can be used for the country specific constancy check. There is no phantom/test object specified. Any
country-specific phantom/object can be used. For Germany there are two test objects defined (see below).

Test sequence:
One AEC examination (X-Ray).
or
One FREE exposure (X-Ray).

Preparation:
21mm AL, SID 110/150cm
NO GRID !!
______________________________

Special for FS fix (Wallstand):

Fixed SID within a range of 170-210 / 210-260


cm
Make sure the correct Generator APR file is
loaded for fixed SID !!
APRs: dd18xxx.tdl / dd22xxx.tdl

Figure 4-7, Constancy

Objects required (to be obtained locally):

plate DIN „6868/50 (geometry)“, 5mAs for speed 400.


plate DIN „6868/58 (contrast)“, 45mAs for speed 400.

Online help text:


This procedure is used to test the constancy of the system
at 70 kV

- select RGDV Table or Wall


- structure plate for geometry and spatial resolution
- structure plate for contrast resolution
- attenuation plate (e.g. 21 mm Al)
- SID and grid according to normal working conditions
- A hardcopy can be printed using the reprint function.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-89


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.3.11 Universal Test Object


This test is prepared to be used for any locally preferred test objects.

Online help text:

This procedure can be used to analyze any test object

- select RGDV Table or Wall


- it is processed and printed using standard processing

4.3.12 Visual Erasure Test


This test is used to check for so called “GHOST” Images. A high dose X-Ray (small size) shot is applied.
A second shot with lower dose (larger size) is applied.
The result image must be checked if the high dose image is still visible.
There are no result values available.

Test sequence:
One X-Ray shot with HIGH dose. One
with LOW dose.

Preparation:
21mm AL, SID 110/150 cm
WITH GRID
_______________________________________
Special for FS fix (Wallstand):

Fixed SID within a range of 170-210 / 210-260 cm


Make sure the correct Generator APR file is loaded for
fixed SID !!
APRs: dd18xxx.tdl / dd22xxx.tdl

Online help text


This procedure is used to test the effect of ghost images

- select RGDV Table or Wall


- 21mmAl prefiltration - grid - SID = 110cm (table) 150cm (wall)
- release and confirm one Image-image
- wait 60 seconds until the second examination is selected
- release and confirm second Image-image
- a hardcopy can be printed using the reprint function

3-90 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Figure 4-8, Visual Erasure first image (low dose)

Figure 4-9,Visual Erasure first image (high dose)

The square “high dose” x-ray field should not be visible anymore in the second image. See figure(s) above.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-91


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.4 Result Tool


The Result Tool is designed to display alphanumeric results produced by the Image Quality tests. The results
are categorized to be in limits or out of limits. The related limits are shown in the particular screen.
The particular limits are mentioned under the test itself.

Levels of classification:
1. Accepted
2. Good
3. Ok
4. Warning
5. Error
The limits are fixed for every test. Some errors and or warnings can be seen as tolerable some can lead to an
exchange of the detector.

Level 1–3 Qualifies the Detector to be in specifications for medical usage.


Level 4 Indicates IQ problems. A Detector exchange could be required.
This must not be an urgent state.
Level 5 Indicates an urgent IQ problem.
Check if interfacing, cabling, power supplies are ok and the check / calibration where
performed correctly. If those peripheral items are functional the Detector must be
exchanged!

Selects the required


Exits the tool Detector :
Æ table
Æ tomo
Æ wall
Æ HCU (still in but not supported)
Displays test or
test-group. CLICK
jumps to the next Navigator pull-down to jump
level. The last level to different levels.
links to the related
Result screen.

Status window. This


indicates the final result.
Export data to the
Transfer Directory:
top0.dat, top1.dat,
top2.dat
Test results can be
marked to prevent them to
House keeping will be deleted by “house
delete unmarked keeping".
results.

Figure 4-10, Result Tool, Main Screen

3-92 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

4.4.1 Result Display


The Result Display Tool is mainly separated into different areas:

General Information
HCU calibration (NOTE: With DiDi release 1.4 the HCU results are not supported anymore)
Detector Results (Tests & calibration)
Status Limits
Panel Results

Two different result screens are available. They are test dependant:
1. Result Display Type I (general): This screen contains results over the whole detector area.
2. Result Display Type II (general): This screen contains results over the four panel areas.

Figure 4-11, Result Display (Type I)

Figure 4-12, Result Display (Type II)

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-93


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.4.2 Handling the result Information

Export Data:
This transfers the results data to the transfer directory. (/DATA/Transfer)
Dependent on what is displayed under “Test group” only data situated below this group is saved.
To save ALL result-data make sure TOP is displayed before clicking on “Export Data”.
This creates the file (in .../DATA/transfer):

1. Table Detector Æ top_0.dat


3. Tomo Detector Æ top_1.dat
4. Wall Detector Æ top_2.dat

Mark Tests (Results):


This marks tests to prevent the data from being deleted while House keeping is performed.

House keeping:
This deletes unmarked Results data. It helps to keep an overview of relevant data. Especially initial
acceptance data just after the installation can be marked as “ reference tests”.

4.4.3 ECV value

Definition of ‘Effective Cluster Value’ (ECV):

The “Pixel calibration & Tomo Pixel calibration” detects and classifies untypical pixels automatically. These
untypical pixels are added via a weighted sum we call ECV, in which isolated pixels contribute with a low
weight compared to clinically more relevant larger clusters (e.g. whole lines / columns).
This value allows a good classification of the quality of the detector concerning the amount of defective pixel
dependent on their location.
Limits:
Accepted: 0 - 230000
Good: > 230000 - 270000
OK: > 270000 - 458400
Error: > 458400

4.4.4 Line / colum defects

Any single line/column defect will not lead to an error condition.

A triple-line/column leads to an error condition Æ A detector replacement is usually necessary.

3-94 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

4.5 Tic Tool (Test Image Creation Tool)

The TIC TOOL is designed to create and send test images to nodes / devices connected to DigitalDiagnost.

• Local print ( point to point )


• Remote print (EV Print)
• DICOM store
• DICOM Print

For more details please refer to the separate UNIT manual: TIC Tool.

A short description how to use the tool in STANDARD mode is given below.

1
2

3 6 7

Figure 4-13, TIC Tool

Select the device to which the test image is going to be sent 1

1. Select the required image size 2

2. Keep this default (active) 3

3. Select the image type to be created 4

4. Click on 5 “Create Images” to create the selected images

5. Click on 6 to open the VIEWER. The VIEWER already shows the created images.

They can be printed (DICOM or point-to-point) or send as a DICOM image.

6. Select 7 to delete the created images.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-95


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

PRINT
Print the tool via the viewer:

1. Enter the Viewer (6)


2. Select an image for printing
3. In the Viewer: Click: “Print” to enter the print tool / (Or Click: Store (eg. PACS))
4. In the print tool: Move the image into the Viewport
5. In the print tool: Click the print icon

5 Assistance

5.1 Command Tool


This button starts a Command Tool (CMDTOOL) window to have access to the UNIX command level.

5.2 Clear calibration

This button deletes the files for GAIN, PIXEL and OFFSET calibration (Table, Tomo and Wall).
This can be done for each detector separately.

NOTE

After Clear calibration is used, make sure a System Restart is performed twice before a new Detector
calibration is made ! A second restart is required to re-activate the offset calibration.
- Make sure that no image in the processing queue !
- Never use the un-calibrated Detector for patient examinations !!!

3-96 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Procedure:

Click on: Clear calibration.

¾ Select the required Detector (Table/Tomo/Wall) of which the calibration should be


deleted.

¾ Check if the Detector already reached working temperature (about 35 - 50°C) before
calibrating!

¾ Make sure that a “fresh” Detector calibration is performed after old files are deleted to
guarantee good Image Quality.

Clear Calibration requires two times a re-start of the application software !!!

Clear calibration is used …

in case of a detector replacement.

If the application software is upgraded the calibration as usually deleted. The OFFSET
calibration is re-activated and needs to performed.

Clear calibration is not used …

in case of a regular re-calibration.

Clear calibration is “one way” - If performed the calibration-files cannot be re-activated.


A re-calibration of the required detector is necessary.

All result values for the selected detector removes also.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-97


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

5.3 Logfiles

This is a Logfile-viewer for the different processes of


the system.

Click here to activate (highlight) the required log file


and click Display.

Exit closes the tool.

Figure 5-1, Log files

5.4 Package Information

This screen gives an overview of the release status of every software-package.

Click here to activate (highlight) the required package-information (e.g. “PMSdidi” ) and click Package Info.

Figure 5-2, Package Info

3-98 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

5.5 PCR Scanner Cleaning

This function is only applicable when a Compano Reader (not for S+ !!) is connected and active. For details
please refer to the PCR Compano Release Bulletin.

5.6 Clinical QC (Reject Analysis)

Clinical QC is a statistic tool, which gives the user a possibility to calculate the amounts of rejects and also
collect the reasons for rejecting images.
When active, the user is prompted/forced to enter/select a reason for rejecting/repeating an image.
The table of possible explanations/reasons is prepared in the Configuration Tool Æ Clinical QC.

Clinical QC is only available when the license is activated in the Customization Manager.
To enter the QC tool: Service Tools Æ Acceptance Æ Clinical QC

Figure 5-3, Clinical QC (Image Statistics)

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-99


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

5.6.1 Set-Up & activate Clinical QC (optional)

1. Enter the license (CM Manager)


2. Customize the QC list in the Configuration tool according to customers requirements

Æ Service Tool Æ Set-Up Æ System Configuration Æ Clinical QC

3. Enter the Clinical QC tool: Service Tools Æ Acceptance Æ Clinical QC

Figure 5-4, QC Image Statistics

3-100 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

Select (filter) : Rejected / Confirmed or ALL to be displayed.


Also set the time range to be analyzed.

5.6.2 Export the Image Statistics (Results)

EXPORT

Figure 5-6, Image Table Result Export

The image result table can be exported to: TRANSFER / USB Stick or any other directory.
Formats: .csv

Click on the “Export” button Æ


Æ Select the directory where to copy Æ Select the file format Æ Click on “Save”

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-101


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

5.6.3 Modify columns in the Image data table

Via the arrows columns can be added or removed .

5.6.4 Display & Export the statistics results

Press on “Statistics” to get this screen:

EXPORT

Figure 5-8, Statistics – Export

The statistics result table can be exported to: TRANSFER / USB Stick or any other directory.
(Note: When the USB stick is mounted it is handled like a “floppy”. Copy the files to “ /floppy “.
Formats: html, txt or rtf

Click on the “Export” button Æ


Æ Select the directory where to copy Æ Select the file format Æ Click on “Save”

3-102 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

5.6.5 Export the reject analysis table

Click on the “Export” button Æ


Æ Select the directory where to copy Æ Select the file format Æ Click on “Save”.

The statistics result table (.csv) can be exported to: TRANSFER / USB Stick or any other directory.

6 Useful Instruction & Functionalities

6.1 Save an image as PNG (Viewer Tool)

LEFT MOUSE
BUTTON opens the
pop-up.
Select “Save as
PNG”

Figure 6-1, Save as PNG from the viewing Tool

“Save as PNG” converts and saves the current image to the “TRANSFER” directory.

6.2 How to check for installed packages or Extension Levels

• In the Service Tool use Software Release Information. Refer to the screen above !

• Or use pkginfo to display the installed packages:

• Open a commandtool.
:
pkginfo9|9grep PMS (Æ Display of all PMS packages (i.e. PMSextL2))
or
pkginfo9|9grep extL (Æ Display of all Extension Level packages (i.e. PMSextL2))

If only pkginfo (no grep) is used all packages including SUN packages are displayed.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-103


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

6.3 How to create Detector & IQ info files (/DATA/TRANSFER)

1. Detector Data Files: setupinfo_0.dat & elecstatus_0.dat

• Enter the Detector Diagnostic Tool:


System Î Service Î Password Î Diagnostics Î Detector

• Select: Table Detector

• Click on : Detector Configuration

• Click on : EXIT

• Click on : Electrical Details

• Click (2x): EXIT

2. RESULT Tool data files

• Enter the Acceptance Tool:

System Î Service Î Password Î Acceptance Î Image Quality

• Enter Result Tool: Result

• Select: Table Detector

• Click on: Export Data

• This creates the top_0.dat in the TRANSFER directory.


Select: Tomo Detector
Click on: Export Data

• This creates the top_1.dat in the TRANSFER directory.

• Select: Wall Detector


• Click on: Export Data
• Click on: EXIT

This creates the top_1.dat in the TRANSFER directory.

3. Miscellaneous Detector configuration files

Open a Command Tool:

: detector <return>

This is an alias function which saves several data to the ..DATA/TRANSFER directory.

3-104 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

6.4 How to create an homogeneous image (one for table / wall & one tomo)

• Enter Patientlist.

• Create a test patient named: “testtable” combined with a THORAX examination.

• If WALL is available: Create a test patient named: “testwall” combined with a WALL examination.

• Select patient “testtable” or “testwall”.

• SETTINGS (TABLE/WALL):
- Generator: NO AEC, 70KV, 5 mAs
- Collimator to 43 x 43cm
- 21mm AL
- default SID, no GRID
Make sure there is no object in the X-ray field !!

• Release and confirm the exposure(s).

• Note down the acquisition number(s) (image-number(s)) in the processing window.

• Select patient “testomo”.

• SETTINGS (TOMO):
- Generator: NO AEC, 70KV, 5mAs
- Collimator to 43 x 43cm
- 21mm AL
- default SID, no GRID

Make sure there is no object in the X-ray field !!

• Release and confirm the exposure.

• Fill in the image-number in the processing window.

6.5 How to COPY an image to DOR / CDROM

• While the image is processed, fill in the number shown in the Status Bar window.
(Î Processing)

• Enter the Service Tool.

• Insert and load DOR / Optical Disk (Status Bar Î External Device (DOR) Î load (laden)).

• Open a Command Tool.

• : cdP <return>
(this enters the Pre-Image directory)

: ll *“the number you noted down before”.xxx <return>

• Mark the image name by using the cursor. Use the copy button on the keyboard.

• : cp9"filename”9/EOD <return>

Unload DOR: Status Bar Î External Device (Optical Disk/DOR) Î unload

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-105


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

6.6 How to perform a FSCK (filecheck) on DOR (U10 only).

• Enter the Service Tool.

• Open a Command Tool.

• Insert DOR.

• : dor9fsck <return>

(note: dor mount / umount is made automatically)

6.7 How format a DOR via command tool DOR (U10 only)

• Enter the Service Tool.

• Open a Command Tool.

• Insert DOR.

• : dor9format <return>

(note: dor9mount / umount is not required)

6.8 How to create a “blank Image” & Copy to CDROM (U10 Æ DOR)

• Enter the Acceptance Tool.

(System Î Service Î Password Î Acceptance Î Image Quality)

• Select: Electronic Noise and perform the test.

• After the result image has been confirmed fill in the acquisition number (Processing window).

When the processing is completed:

• Insert and load the Optical Disk (Status Bar Æ External Device Æ load (laden).

• Open a Command Tool.

• : cdP <return> (this enters the Pre-Image directory)


<return>
• : ll *“the number you noted down before”.xxx <return>

• Mark the image-name using the cursor. Use the copy button on the keyboard.

• : cp9"filename"9/export/home/DATA/TRANSFER <return>

• From the Service Tool use: Transfer dir. to Optical Disc to burn the file(s) to CDROM

3-106 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

6.9 How to compress a file

• Open a Command Tool.


• Enter the directory where the file is located. (i.e. alias: cdC, cdR, cdP, cdPO...)
or use the “cd“ command.
• : gzip9“filename” <return>
(another way: : compress9“filename” <return>)

The zipped file now has the ending “.gz”.

• To unzip the file:



• : gunzip9"filename.gz" <return>
The original file is now present in the directory.
This file can also be “unzipped” with standard packer / un-packing software on the PC.

6.10 How to COPY a file to FLOPPY (U10 only)

Mount floppy:
• : floppy9mount <return>

Copy the file to floppy:

• Enter the directory (on disk) containing the file (i.e. image).

• Mark the image name by using the cursor.


Î Use the copy button on the keyboard.

• : cp9“filename”9/floppy <return>

Check the floppy contents:

: ls9/floppy <return>

Umount floppy:

: floppy9umount <return>

This can be helpful for “jpegged” images or logfiles!

For any filecopies it is also possible to use the filemanager:

6.11 Filemanager (filemgr)

Instead of manually copying files it is also possible to use the filemanager:

• Open a command tool


• Type in: filemgr& <return>

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-107


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

• The filemanager is self-explaining.


It supports drag & drop / copy & paste…

6.12 How to create a snapshot

Open a Command Tool.

: snapshot& <return>
or:
: sdtimage& <return>

The snapshot tool is self-explaining. The output format is .ras (SUN RASTER). SUN RASTER images can be
used in most of the imaging tools (PC).
You may store the image directly to the TRANSFER directory.
Remotely you can download the image to the PC using WINSCP or via RSN.

The easiest way to create a snapshot of the current screen is the following command:

<Alt> <Ç shift> <F8>


This command creates the current screen snapshot in the TRANSFER directory as a JPEG image. The image
quality is restricted to keep the image size small.

OR:

<meta> <Ç shift> <F8>

this command opens the snapshot tool.

(note: meta = ‹)

6.13 How to use an USB Memory Stick (only SUN Blade)

The USB stick can be inserted into one of the free USB ports. It is handled like a floppy disk.
Not all types of USB stick are supported. !

6.13.1.1 Manual usage

Mount the stick:


: usb mount <return>

The stick is now part of the file system under “ / floppy ”

Change to the stick:


: cd /floppy <return>

Leave the stick:


: cd <return>

Umount to the stick:


: usb umount <return>

3-108 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x Service Tools

6.13.2 Use “TRANSFER Dir. to USB stick”

The USB stick can also be used to store the zipped content of the TRANSFER directory .
In the Service Tools Æ Assistance Æ Transfer Dir to USB Stick

6.14 Service Tool: “TRANSFER Dir to Storage Medium”

This button stores the contents of the TRANSFER directory to the Optical Disk as a zipped file:

U10 : DOR
Blade : CD-R

The storage process is in progress while the button is dimmed !!

The Optical Disk needs to be mounted first via the Status Bar. (“Load” / “ Laden “).
The file can be “unzipped” on any service PC with WINZIP.

7 Log Files & processes

The log files can be reached on different ways:

1. From the Service Tool: Assistance Æ Logfiles

2. Manually via a Command Tool:


( ..DATA/LOG…& … DATA/LOG/DICOM…)
Æ more9“logfilename.log”

3. Via the Status Bar:

System Æ System Status of Æ click the toggle button to select a current logfile.

Process Function Corresponding Logfile Explanation


acqCtrl Acquisition Controller acqCtrl.Log Image acquisition / storage / image handling
Ali1 Image Processing ali1.Log Pre/Post-Processing
archive Archiving / Storage /DICOM archive.Log Any storage: DICOM/DOR/EV-print
darkSequencer Dark Image process darSequencer.Log Acquis. Of DARK images
detCtrlTable Detector Control Process: detCntrlTable.Log Detector Controller TABLE
TABLE
detCtrlWall Detector Control Process: detCntrlWall.Log Detector Controller WALL
TABLE
grabber - grabber.Log Data collection/ Acquis. Pre-sets/data-
sets/system data
plm Patient List Manager plm.Log Any patientlist process
risconn RIS Process risConn.Log RIS & BWLM handling USIT file creation
risToUsitHandler Send To PCR process risToUsitHandler.Log DIDI to USIT transfer
storeImage Storage storeImage.Log Storage to hard disk
sysctrl System Controller sysctrl.Log Misc. messages concerning general system
functions.
ticTool Test image generator ticTool.Log Test Image Creation Tool
veritool Verification Tool veritool.Log Verification Tool
autoPrint Auto Print EASY VISION autoprint.Log Local & EV-print / Printer management
(advanced/remote print) EVPRINT.log
xexam Examination Controller xexam.Log StartExamination/Workflow and MPPS
xservice Backup/Restore - several service procedures
xstartuptool StartUp Tool xstartuptool.Log Process start-up / Tidy-up
xstatusbar StatusBar xstatusbar.Log All status bar processes / messages
xviewer Viewer xviewer.log Pre/Post-processing. Shutter / MPPS
messages
DICOM DICOM.log DICOM.log DICOM: all DICOM processes as:
MPPS/Storage/Stor.Commit

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 3-109


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Service Tools DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

DicomAgent DICOM DicomAgent.Log DICOM general


BWLM DICOM (BWLM) bwlmscu.Log Spec. BWLM handling
dblink Link: DB Æ ALI dblink.Log Image handling / storage
dtwmMonitor dtwmMonitor.Log User interface. (GUI)
Workfile handler Workfile handler wfh.Log Queue handling / start & restart

8 Reference Plane & Image Scaling

Within the set-up of AQDSs two different “reference planes” can be selected: Table or Detector.
The selection has a significant influence on the image scaling/magnification.

For more details please refer to the application brochure: “ Magnification factors”. (12NC: 4512 987 0950_)
This brochure is part of the DigitalDiagnost documentation CDROM.

Figure 8-1, Selecting the required Reference Plane (AQDS)

3-110 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x / 1.5.x REPLACEMENTS

REPLACEMENTS

Workstation DigitalDiagnost

Release 1.4.x / 1.5.x

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 Exchange of the PCI interface boards (U10 / Blade 2500) .................................................... 2


1.1 Jumper setting FOL PCI Interface (U10 & Blade 2500) ............................................................. 2
1.2 Replacement of FOL board for system with RS485 interface box ............................................. 2
1.3 U10 ........................................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 Blade 2500.................................................................................................................................. 4

2 Installation of the DOR drive (U10) ......................................................................................... 4

3 Installation of the SCSI Harddisk (U10) .................................................................................. 5

4 Exchange of the NVRAM.......................................................................................................... 7


4.1 NVRAM (U10 / Blade 2500)........................................................................................................ 7
4.1.1 SET-UP procedure...................................................................................................................... 8

5 Exchange a complete SUN workstation (U10 Æ U10)......................................................... 11

6 SUN Blade 2500 Workstation................................................................................................. 12


6.1 Replacement SUN Blade 2500 Æ SUN Blade 2500 ................................................................ 14
6.1.1 Keep in mind ............................................................................................................................. 14
6.2 Replacement SUN U10 Æ SUN Blade 2500 ............................................................................ 14
6.3 Transfer the U10 (1.5.x) Backup to SUN Blade 2500 (1.5.x) ................................................... 15
6.3.1 Required hardware ................................................................................................................... 15
6.3.2 Preparation ............................................................................................................................... 15
6.3.3 BACKUP-Transfer (U10 Æ Blade)............................................................................................ 16
6.3.4 Nice to know commands........................................................................................................... 17

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 4-1


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REPLACEMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x/1.5.x

1 Exchange of the PCI interface boards (U10 / Blade 2500)

1.1 Jumper setting FOL PCI Interface (U10 & Blade 2500)

The default jumper setting is “RS 485”. All current systems AND most of the installed base does not have
the RS 485 interface box. The installation cable connects to the FOL board via the adapter cable: 4512
131 46071 (9pin Sub-D / miniDIN).

FOL PCI Interface

W3 W2 W1
B1

RS232

X1 RS485

RS232
X2
RS485

W6 W5 W4
B2

Jumper: W1 - W3 ( Wallstand Interface, X2)

Jumper: W4-W6 ( Table Interface, X1 )

--> Upper position = RS 232, Used in combination with RS485 box


--> Lower position = RS 485, Used without RS485 box

1.2 Replacement of FOL board for system with RS485 interface box

From November 2001 onwards the DigitalDiagnost Systems are delivered with a new FOL Interface
board (SUN PCI, 4512 108 10104). This board includes the realization of the RS485 interface
already. The RS 485 box is not used anymore. This kit is compatible for systems with OLD and
NEW FOL interface board.
It includes the new FOL interface board , two adapter cables and this manual. The new FOL board
is fully backwards compatible.

4-2 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x / 1.5.x REPLACEMENTS

Dismantle the RS485 box (not used anymore !). Use the delivered adapter cable (s) to connect the FOL
interface with the existing cable (s). (Jumpersetting: RS232 !!)

OLD board (RS232) NEW FOL board NEW FOL board


4512 108 10101 FOL interface FOL interface
4512 108 10104 Jumpers: 4512 108 10104 Jumpers:
(part of the kit) RS232 (part of the kit) RS485

B1/B2 X1/X2 B1/B2 X1/X2 B1/B2 X1/X2


SUN SUN SUN

RS485
RS232
RS232

4512 131 46071


adapter cable
4512 130 91631 4512 130 91631
(part of the kit)
RS 485 box

RS 485 box

FOL FOL FOL

RS485
RS485

RS485

4512 131 46081 4512 131 46081


4512 131 46081

B1 X100 B1 X100 B1 X100

TH / VE / VT / VR TH / VE / VT / VR TH / VE / VT / VR

1.: Old level .1 FOL Interface with RS 485 box


2.: New FOL Interface (.4 or higher) . With RS 485 box. Jumpersetting: “RS232”.
NOT RECOMMENDED!
3 .: New FOL Interface (.4 or higher). No RS 485 box . Jumpersetting: “RS485”.
RECOMMENDED !!!

1.3 U10

The U10 is delivered with 3 (4) PCI interface boards:


1. PCI CAN Interface
2. PCI FOL Interface
3. PCI HCU Interface (optional). Not supported anymore with 1.5.x !!
4. PCI SCSI Interface

Make sure to use the pre-defined slot for each board. They will also work on different PCI positions.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 4-3


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REPLACEMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x/1.5.x

1.4 Blade 2500


The Sun Blade 2500 is delivered with 2 (3) PCI interface boards:

1. PCI CAN Interface


2. PCI FOL Interface
3. PCI HCU Interface (optional). Not supported anymore with 1.5.x !!

The PCI SCSI Interface is not required for the Blade 2500. It is ON-BOARD.

The PCI Interface boards must be installed ONLY in the “white” socket slots. The green ones cannot be
used. The boards will be damaged. Make sure to use the pre-defined slot for each board. They are usually
indicated with a sticker at the back plane.

2 Installation of the DOR drive (U10)

Figure 2-1, DOR Terminators / Jumper Setting

SCSI Power
connector

Jumper:
SCSI
SCSI Address: 5 Terminators
Position 1 & 3

4-4 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x / 1.5.x REPLACEMENTS

Figure 2-2, Connection of SCSI Harddisk / DOR Drive (U10)

HCU Interface

CAN Interface

FOL Interface

SCSI Controller

SCSI DOR SCSI


drive Harddisk

3 Installation of the SCSI Harddisk (U10)

Replacement & Installation procedure

1. Switch OFF the SUN U10.


2. Open the U10 cover.
3. Disconnect power and IDE cable from the IDE hard disk.
4. Take out the “old” IDE cable (not used anymore).
5. Check the SCSI address: “0” there is no jumper.
6. Take out the IDE hard disk. Instead install the new SCSI hard disk.
7. At the hard disk side of the SCSI cable connect the terminator to the SCSI plug.
8. Install the SCSI cable at the hard disk.
9. Connect the other end as shown in the figure below at the SCSI interface board.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 4-5


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REPLACEMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x/1.5.x

Figure 3-1 Connectors SCSI Harddisk (Cheetah)

power

J5: SCSI Address: “ 0 “ = SCSI connector Æ SCSI controller & Terminator


NO JUMPER !

Figure 3-2, SCSI Terminator-plug at SCSI cable & SCSI address

SCSI Terminator

SCSI harddisk

4-6 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x / 1.5.x REPLACEMENTS

4 Exchange of the NVRAM

In case of a defective NVRAM chip it must be replaced by a new one. The default settings however will
crash the system. Several changes are to be performed.

Good indications that the NVRAM is faulty and needs to be replaced:


Real time clock is not running correctly (if system was switched off)
Ethernet address shows “ff.ff.ff…”
Hostid shows “ffffff” or other strange contents.

The NVRAM module keeps several specific settings for the functionality of the system. Here are some:

• Realtime clock
• Host ID
• Ethernet address
• Several environment setting (see listing below)

NOTE:

In case of an exchange (NVRAM) a new License paper / License Floppy / CDROM is required.
Contact the Service Support Group (CS) in Hamburg to order .
Make sure the following information about the System is send:

new Host ID
System Serial #
Order Number
Country
Customer
Your Name / Tel. / E-Mail / FAX (where to send) / Shipping address.

Send/fax a copy of your licence sheet / or the content of the licence floppy /
cdrom. Preferred via E-Mail.

4.1 NVRAM (U10 / Blade 2500)

This needs to be performed in case the NVRAM or the SUN (incl. NVRAM) is exchanged. Under normal
conditions the software installation process automatically sets the NVRAM correctly. If the NVRAM is
exchanged while the PCI boards are still inserted, a system boot is not possible.
Note Blade 2500:
The NVRAM settings are now buffered by an external (CR 2032) Lithium cell on the main board. If data is
lost it could be expected that the battery is empty and needs to be replaced. Refer to the SUN
documentation for details.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 4-7


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REPLACEMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x/1.5.x

4.1.1 SET-UP procedure

Complete Procedure

1. Perform a backup via the service tool / configuration tool (DB backup Æ DOR / CD-R)

2. Shutdown the SUN workstation


3. Switch OFF the SUN workstation
4. Replace the NVRAM
5. Switch OFF the SUN workstation NOTE: The installation of
6. Re-Install the Operating System. the Operating System and
the Application SW will set
7. Re-Install the Application Package. the NVRAM correctly.
8. Re-Install the Language Package.
9. Restore the backup (s)

4-8 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x / 1.5.x REPLACEMENTS

NVRAM settings U10 ( only to check the contents)


<ok> printenv <Return>

Variable Name Value Default Value


tpe-link-test? true true
scsi-initiator-id 7 7
keyboard-click? false false
keymap
ttyb-rts-dtr-off false false
ttyb-ignore-cd true true
ttya-rts-dtr-off false false
ttya-ignore-cd true true
ttyb-mode 9600,8,n,1,- 9600,8,n,1,-
ttya-mode 9600,8,n,1,- 9600,8,n,1,-
pcia-probe-list 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
pcib-probe-list 1,2,3 1,2,3
mfg-mode off off
diag-level max max
#power-cycles 124
system-board-serial#
system-board-date
fcode-debug? false false
output-device screen screen
input-device keyboard keyboard
load-base 16384 16384
boot-command boot boot
auto-boot? true true
watchdog-reboot? false false
diag-file
diag-device net net
boot-file
boot-device disk disk net
local-mac-address? false false
ansi-terminal? true true
screen-#columns 80 80
screen-#rows 34 34
silent-mode? false false
use-nvramrc? true false
nvramrc 00 1fe.0100.0004 1d spac ...
security-mode none
security-password
security-#badlogins 0
oem-logo
oem-logo? false false
oem-banner
oem-banner? false false
hardware-revision
last-hardware-update
diag-switch? false false

To see the whole contents of nvramrc type in:


ok printenv nvramrc <Return>
nvramrc = 00 1fe.0100.0004 1d spacew! devalias dor /pci@1f,0/pci@1/s
csi@1/disk@5,0 devalias scsi /pci@1f,0/pci@1/scsi@1/disk@0,0

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 4-9


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REPLACEMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x/1.5.x

NVRAM settings Blade 2500 (only to check the contents )

<ok> printenv <Return>

Variable Name Value Default Value


test-args none
diag-passes 1 1
local-mac-address? true true
fcode-debug? false false
silent-mode? false false
scsi-initiator-id 7 7
oem-logo No default
oem-logo? false false
oem-banner No default
oem-banner? false false
ansi-terminal? true true
screen-#columns 80 80
screen-#rows 34 34
ttyb-rts-dtr-off false false
ttyb-ignore-cd true true
ttya-rts-dtr-off false false
ttya-ignore-cd true true
ttyb-mode 9600,8,n,1,- 9600,8,n,1,-
ttya-mode 9600,8,n,1,- 9600,8,n,1,-
output-device ttya screen
input-device keyboard keyboard
auto-boot-on-error? false false
load-base 16384 16384
auto-boot? true true
boot-command boot boot
diag-file
diag-device disk net net
boot-file
boot-device disk disk net
use-nvramrc? true false
nvramrc 106 4 apply config-w! /pci@1e,600000
security-mode none No default
security-password No default
security-#badlogins 0 No default
diag-script none none
diag-level off max
diag-switch? false false
error-reset-recovery boot boot

To see the whole contents of nvramrc type in:


ok printenv nvramrc <Return>

ok
ok printenv nvramrc
nvramrc = 106 4 apply config-w! /pci@1e,600000

4-10 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x / 1.5.x REPLACEMENTS

5 Exchange a complete SUN workstation (U10 Æ U10)

NOTE

In case a Ultra 10 workstation needs to be replaced we recommend to order the


SUN Blade 2500 to replace the old U10 workstation. (only with SW Release ≥ 1.3.1)

NOTE

The NVRAM has to be configured for DiDi or needs to replaced with your original one.
For a new NVRAM make sure to order new licenses.
Note down the new hostID to order new licenses ! or make sure the new licenses are already
delivered with the new workstation.

Exchange Procedure

1. Install the MOD/DOR drive


2. Install the SCSI PCI board & connect the DOR drive to the SCSI controller and to power
3. SWITCH ON the SUN and stop the boot process with Stop-A
4. Proceed with the set-up of the NVRAM (refer to the section before)
5. Switch OFF the SUN
6. Install the PCI boards (FOL/CAN)
7. ONLY ≥1.4.x: Install the Creator Graphics Card and the VGA adapter plug.
8. Install at least 1 GB memory
9. Install Operating System & Application Software
10. Insert the NEW Customization floppy/cdrom ( If the NVRAM is default Æ NEW HOSTID )
11. Insert the CS backup floppy/DOR/CD-R ( If the NVRAM was exchanged. OLD HOSTID ! )
12. Use the Customization Manager to re-enter the settings you noted down from the “old” SUN if the
CS backup could not be restored.
13. Restore the DB backup.
14. Re-start the system.

NOTE

In case of an exchange a new License paper / License Floppy / CDROM is required.


Make sure the following information about the System is available. You are asked for it when ordering the
workstation.

Host ID
System Serial #
Order Number
Country
Customer
Your Name / Tel. / E-Mail / FAX (where to send) / Shipping address

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 4-11


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REPLACEMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x/1.5.x

6 SUN Blade 2500 Workstation

Technical data:

SUN Blade 2500 is delivered with:


- Solaris 8 (5.8) - 3 x 33 MHZ PCI Slots
- 4 x 512 MB (= 2GB) memory / DIMM (used for FOL / CAN / HCU)

- 1 x ≥ 73 GB Hard disk (ultra SCSI) - 3 x PCI 66 MHZ (not used for DiDi)

- 1 x CD-Writer - 1x Graphic Card / Accelerator (XVR 100)

- 1 x 1,28 GHZ CPU - 2 serial ports (Port A & B)

For more details please refer to SUN`s original documentation. The replacement procedures are described
in the SUN Service/Diagnostics/Troubleshooting manual. The SUN documents are delivered with the
system AND are part of the DiDi Documentation CDROM.

Figure 6-1, SUN Blade 2500 Components Identification (on motherboard)

4-12 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x / 1.5.x REPLACEMENTS

Figure 6-2, SUN Blade Backpanel

For detailed information please refer to the SUN pages:


http://sunsolve.sun.com/handbook_pub/Systems/SunBlade2500/SunBlade2500.html

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 4-13


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REPLACEMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x/1.5.x

6.1 Replacement SUN Blade 2500 Æ SUN Blade 2500

NOTE:

In case of an exchange a new License paper / License Floppy / CDROM is required.


Make sure the following information about the System is available. You are asked for it when
ordering the workstation.

Host ID
System Serial #
Order Number
Country
Customer
Your Name / Tel. / E-Mail / FAX (where to send) / Shipping address.

In case the workstation is defective and the replacements of boards did not help or begins to be more
expensive than a complete replacement. This could be the case if the motherboard/CPU needs to be
replaced.

6.1.1 Keep in mind


If you order a new SUN Blade it is required to receive a new license CDROM for the new HostID.
OR you take your OLD NVRAM and install it to the new workstation.
In this case the OLD licenses could be re-used.
If you need to use the new NVRAM (new hostID) some additional set-ups needs to be completed. The
software needs to be installed in a certain sequence.
NOTE:
Backups from different workstations (hostIDs)
Refer to the pages above “Exchange of the NVRAM”. can only be restored when they are based on
the IDENTICAL software release !!
6.2 Replacement SUN U10 Æ SUN Blade 2500
Backup
In case an ULTRA 10 workstation needs to be replaced it is required to restore the U10 backup into the
SUN Blade 2500. There is a big hint…the U10 creates the backup on a DOR..the SUN Blade 2500 cannot
read a DOR but only a CD-R. The U10 does not have a CD-Writer !
There is a tricky way to create a U10 backup on a CD-R by using both workstations connected via a
network or simply a network cross-cable. Both workstations MUST have the same software release. In
other cases the backup cannot be restored.

NOTE:
The Customization Manager settings incl. Licenses cannot be restored to the NEW
workstation.
Note down the values ! In emergency cases: They are stored on the backup CDROM in the
sysinfo.cfg file

Path: CDROM: \ CONFIG_xxxxx \ UNIXBACKUP \ CUSTOMIZATION \ sysinfo.cfg.

The license CDROM delivered for the NEW workstation (SUN Blade) must be restored via
the CM.
Follow the instructions in the “Software Installation” section to proceed.
NOTE:
If the U10 is defective, it is obviously not possible to follow the described procedures.
It is basically required to have both workstations running to transfer the backup (U10 Æ BLADE)!
4-14 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation
© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x / 1.5.x REPLACEMENTS

6.3 Transfer the U10 (1.5.x) Backup to SUN Blade 2500 (1.5.x)

6.3.1 Required hardware

1. Network CROSS cable


2. An empty BACKUP DOR
3. One or more empty CDROMs

6.3.2 Preparation

1. Disconnect the workstation from the local network.


2. Connect both workstations via the network CROSS cable.
3. Set-Up the workstations according to the table below.

SAME Software
Release required to
transfer & restore the
U10 Backup !

U10 SUN Blade 2500


IP Addr. : 42.42.42.42 IP Addr. : 42.42.42.43
Network CROSS cable
Netmask : 255.255.255.0 or Netmask : 255.255.255.0
local network

NOTE

If the two workstations are already connected to the customers network it is possible to use the given IP
settings instead of using cross cable with the shown “dummy” addresses.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 4-15


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REPLACEMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x/1.5.x

6.3.3 BACKUP-Transfer (U10 Æ Blade)


If only ONE monitor for both workstations is available it needs to be connected to the workstation currently
used. A second monitor could make it easier but is not required.

Ultra 10 remarks SUN Blade 2500


Install 1.5.x U10 1.5.X: Install 1.5.x Software
Start the Application 1 GB RAM & CREATOR (if not done already)
Restore 1.4.x BACKUP GRAPHICS CARD
REQUIRED !!
Create 1.5.x BACKUP on DOR Keep the DOR in the drive.
Keep the DOR mounted
(Status Bar)
Connect U10 and SunBlade
with a Network CROSS
cable or use the local
network.

Set-Up the U10 Use the CM Manager to set- Set-Up the Blade IP- address (i.e):
up IP addresses &
Netmasks.
IP addresses (i.e) or any other
IP : 42.42.42.42 IP : 42.42.42.43
NetMask : 255.255.255.0 NetMask : 255.255.255.0
Remote Login on U10 (Remote Menu)

Open a commandtool:

ssh9service@42.42.42.43

RSA key … YES fingerprint…answer : yes


Service password: ******
From Remote Menu: Select 13 (UNIX)

Copy contents of DOR / EOD


from U10 Î SunBlade (TRANSFER)

At the UNIX prompt:

scp9-r9/EOD/*9
service@42.42.42.43:/export/home/SABRE/DA
TA/TRANSFER

RSA key … YES fingerprint…answer : yes


Service password: ******

¾ Restore the 1.5.x BACKUP (TRANSFER)


from CD-R by using the standard restore
process.
¾ Check/Correct the CM settings.
¾ Create a new 1.5.x BACKUP on the Blade.
4-16 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation
© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.4.x / 1.5.x REPLACEMENTS

6.3.4 Nice to know commands

6.3.4.1 Known problem when transferring the Backup


It could happen that the scp (secure copy) / ssh (secure shell) creates strange error messages when the
authorization key changed.:

“ Remote host identification has changed. It is possible….”.

The copy process could not be completed. This could happen if the software has been re-installed.

Solution: Delete all files like “knownhost…” in:

/export/home/SABRE/.ssh/……

Enter a command tool:

cd <return> Æ Access the SABRE home directory:


/export/home/SABRE
cd9.ssh <return>

ls <return> Æ List the content of: .ssh


rm9knownhosts* <return> Æ Removes all files with: “knownhosts…”

Keep the file “authorized_keys” in the directory!!!

6.3.4.2 Alias to reach the TRANSFER directory

cdT <return>

6.3.4.3 U10: Restore a Backup from CDROM


It is possible to restore a valid BACKUP also from CDROM.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 4-17


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x ADJUSTMENTS

ADJUSTMENTS

DigitalDiagnost

Release 1.5.x
10.11.2006

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 HCU Calibration ........................................................................................................................ 2

2 Detector Calibration ................................................................................................................. 2

3 Display Calibration (Monitor Calibration)............................................................................... 3


3.1 Activate the Display Calibration .................................................................................................. 3

4 APR Update Tool....................................................................................................................... 6


4.1 Procedure ................................................................................................................................... 6
4.2 If APR Up-date was not successful ............................................................................................ 8
4.2.1 APR Up-date incomplete ............................................................................................................ 8
4.3 Manual APR mapping................................................................................................................. 8
4.3.1 APRs inconsistent (Error Message)............................................................................................ 9
4.4 If APRs are inconsistent ........................................................................................................... 10

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 3-1, Display Calibration Screen..................................................................................................4


Figure 3-2, Error during Calibration / Verification ..................................................................................4
Figure 3-3, Result Screen......................................................................................................................5
Figure 4-1, APR Up-Date, Overview .....................................................................................................6
Figure 4-2, Un-mapped APRs ...............................................................................................................8

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 5-1


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
ADJUSTMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

1 HCU Calibration

The HCU Calibration is a relevant procedure to guarantee good image quality. The calibration consists of a
Greylevel Calibration AND the Scale Calibration.

The detailed procedure is described in the UNIT manual “DICOM Print”.

2 Detector Calibration
The detector calibration is divided into 3 parts:

1. Offset calibration / Tomo Offset calibration

The Offset calibration identifies a special artifact type and will not be visible anymore when this kind of
artifact is not found.

2. Gain calibration / Tomo Gain calibration

The Gain calibration is the only calibration, which needs to be performed every 6-8 weeks. The customer can
do this.

3. Pixel calibration / Tomo Pixel Calibration

The Pixel calibration is performed by the system automatically with every patient image. There is no need to
perform it manually.

After the installation of a new system or the replacement of a detector all the three calibrations need to be
performed initially.

For detailed information refer to the Service Tool section.

5-2 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x ADJUSTMENTS

3 Display Calibration (Monitor Calibration)

This set-up is used to calibrate the DIDI monitor based on the users basic monitor settings and light situation
in the room.

3.1 Activate the Display Calibration

The Display Calibration Tool needs to be activated first:

Configuration Tool Æ Unstructured Items Æ User Interface: OptDisplayCalibration = Yes

Restart the application software to access the tool. The Button: Display Calibration is now available in the
Service Tools screen:

Click on Display Calibration to start the tool.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 5-3


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
ADJUSTMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Figure 3-1, Display Calibration Screen

Preparation:

¾ Dim the room light as it is usually used while working with the system.
¾ Set the monitors brightness & contrast to a basic position as the user works with the system.
¾ No test image is required to perform the calibration !!

Sliders cannot be used ! Only keyboard inputs are allowed. (Note: “NUM PAD” is usually de-activated).
Use : <return> / <enter> at the keyboard to enter the values.

When entering values, which are not in range an, error messages appears and the input field becomes RED.

Figure 3-2, Error during Calibration / Verification

5-4 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x ADJUSTMENTS

Calibration Procedure:

1. Calibration
¾ Enter the Display Calibration Tool
¾ Select the first input field with the cursor
The cursor position sets the monitors brightness for each step)
¾ Measure the light in the middle of the monitor
¾ Enter the measured value into the filed the cursor is positioned
¾ Proceed this measurement until all steps are measured
¾ Click on “Apply Calibration”

2. Verification:
¾ Re-measure all different steps in the same way as done in the calibration and enter them into the
corresponding fields.
¾ Click on “Apply Verification”

3. Result

The result is shown in a graph:

GREEN marks:
Result after
Calibration.

RED marks:
Result after
Calibration.

Default / Ideal
grey curve

Grey curve after


calibration.

Figure 3-3, Result Screen

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 5-5


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
ADJUSTMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4 APR Update Tool

The APR Update Tool synchronizes the APRs programmed in the OPTIMUS Generator with the database of
the DigitalDiagnost System.
RGDVs: ONE CS System:
3 Table 1
Tomo 2
2 Wall 3
Free 4

1 RGDVs: TWO CS System:

Table 1
Tomo 2
- 3
Free 4
Wall 5
Free2 6
Figure 4-1, APR Up-Date, Overview

NOTE:
While the Up-Date process is running do not activate any other function on the System.
Do not press any button on the Generator / Control Desk.

4.1 Procedure

Make sure the Optimus Generator and the Sun Workstation are switched on.

1. Enter the Service Tool.

2. Klick on SET-UP / APR-Update.

3. Click on START. 1
4. Wait until the process was successfully finished (message).

5. Click on Save to DB to store the synchronization data into the database. 2

6. After the save process ended successfully click EXIT to leave the tool. 3
7. Switch OFF / ON the Generator.

8. Restart the System (System Æ Logout Æ Restart).

9. Switch OFF the Generator Æ Switch ON the Generator.

If the synchronization process between the database and the Optimus was successfully finished the
following message appears:

5-6 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x ADJUSTMENTS

NOTE
If EXIT is used before saving the changes the following warning pops-up:

Note:
Until the synchronization information was not saved to the database the update is not active.
In this case the System does not get ready. The APR update must be repeated.

If the save procedure was ok the following pop-up is displayed:

• Click on “Dismiss” to confirm the screen.


• Exit the APR Update Tool.
• Restart the System.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 5-7


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
ADJUSTMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.2 If APR Up-date was not successful

4.2.1 APR Up-date incomplete

It is possible that APRs situated in the Database as a part of an AQDS have no “partner” in the Optimus
generator. They cannot be linked automatically.
This must be performed manually using the following screen. This screen appears as soon as “stand alone”
APRs are found. They need to be linked manually.

If unmapped APRs are identified while the APR-Update is saved, this Screen pops-up:

Click on Dismiss to confirm the screen.

Another screen appears. This activates a manual mapping mode.

4.3 Manual APR mapping


If un-mapped APRs are identified by the System this screen pops up:

Figure 4-2, Un-mapped APRs

5-8 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x ADJUSTMENTS

The “?” indicates, that this APR has no corresponding APR in the Optimus. The “X” indicates that the
mapping was valid. After all APRs are mapped correctly (no “?” anymore) the “confirm button can be
pressed. This brings you back to the main screen of the APR Update Tool. Click on “save” again. This
should now be successful.

Mapping the Database APR to a valid Optimus APR:

1. Activate the first APR from the list (highlighted).

2. Click on EDIT.

3. The selection screen give you a list of all Optimus APRs. The correct APR must be selected.

4. Click on OK to activate the selected APR. This brings you back to the mapping screen.

5. If all APRs in the mapping screen show no “?” anymore click on confirm. This brings you back to
the main APR Update screen.

6. Click on “SAVE”. And wait until the “successful” pop-up is displayed:

7. Click on dismiss and leave the APR Update Tool ( “EXIT”).

8. The procedure is now completed.

9. Shutdown and Restart the System (System Æ Stop Æ Restart).

NOTE
If the APRs data-set language stored into the Generator does not correspond to the one used in the
DigitalDiagnost software (language !) the mapping always run into failure condition.

4.3.1 APRs inconsistent (Error Message)

If inconsistent APRs are identified by the System i.e. after a restart this message occurs:

In this case the APR update must be performed:

1. Click on ignore to confirm this screen.

2. Enter the Service Tool (if not made already).

3. Activate the APR Update Tool and perform the up-date procedure.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 5-9


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
ADJUSTMENTS DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

4.4 If APRs are inconsistent

Error:
"APRs are inconsistent" even when APR update was just made successfully.

Special situation:
The system uses only ONE RGDV (+FREE): RGDV TABLE or RGDV WALL STAND

Could happen when:


New (modified) APRsets are uploaded
APRs with different language are uploaded

With this system configuration it could happen that the APR update succeeds properly.
BUT...
When an examination is performed, the system asks for another APR update.
With the error message: "APRs are inconsistent"

Remedy:

Create the RGDV3 once on the generator. (AGENT)


Fill it with the APRs from the CD (APR Manager)
Create in Customization Manager the Wall Stand VS (temporary) / Or table
Perform an APR update once (DiDi)
Delete the RGDV3 at the Generator (AGENT: Tube to "none")
Remove the temporary wall stand / table settings in the Configuration / Cust. Manager.

It does not help to “ZERO” the Optimus CU or to delete ALL APRs....no need to try it.

This effect may also happen if there is ONLY one wall stand (RGDV3) but no table (RGDV1). Follow the
instructions as described above. (Create an additional RGDV temporary and fill it with APRs....and delete it
later )

5-10 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x EASY VISION PRINT

EASY VISION PRINT

DigitalDiagnost

Release 1.5.x

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 Easy Vision Print for DigitalDiagnost................................................................................ 3


1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 3
1.2 Restoring Default Print Protocols (EasyVision) ..................................................................... 4
1.3 Setting up the systems .......................................................................................................... 4
1.3.1 Setting up EasyVision RAD ................................................................................................... 6
1.3.1.1 Setting up a new EV DICOM Node ....................................................................................... 6
1.3.2 Setting up DigitalDiagnost ..................................................................................................... 7
1.3.2.1 Setting up the DIDI DICOM node (s) .................................................................................. 7
1.4 Printing DigitalDiagnost images and PCR images on same Film ......................................... 9

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 6-1


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REMOTE PRINT EV DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

6-2 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x EASY VISION PRINT

1 Easy Vision Print for DigitalDiagnost

Advanced Print (EV Print) cannot be ordered any longer with new systems. It can be used on existing
systems also when upgraded to 1.5.x.

EasyVision Print & DICOM Print cannot be used in parallel!

1.1 Introduction
EasyVision RAD is able from release 4.2L2 onwards to work as a dedicated print server for DigitalDiagnost.
Through this configuration DigitalDiagnost is able to use printers and print formats configured on EasyVision
RAD.

So so-called Advanced Printing for DigitalDiagnost option was available as a complete software/hardware
package:

Advanced Printing for DigitalDiagnost 9896 050 05261

EasyVisionRAD SUN Blade 1500


EV RAD software 1.4.1: 4.2L6
EV RAD single user software key 4.2
EV RAD PCR software key 4.2
EV RAD EasyPrint software key 4.2

The EasyVision RAD serving as a print server holds an ASCII file named configuredPrinters.dat in the
directory /easydata/UI/configuration. This file contains all configured printers with their specific identification
strings as they are used in the user interface of the DigitalDiagnost. Every printer is listed in combination with
real printer name, used film format, film type, etc.

For printing remotely via EV RAD the DigitalDiagnost is using special print
protocols. These protocols must be available on the EasyVision in order to
perform printing. From release 4.2L3 or higher, 20 default print protocols
for DigitalDiagnost are available on the EV RAD in addition to the other
standard protocols.
Print protocols for DigitalDiagnost are always starting with the prefix DD
(see figure). Other protocols cannot be used.

When the system has been upgraded from R4.2.Lxx software and an
existing customization has been kept, the 'DD' protocols do not show up in
the list. In that case the protocols must be loaded manually.
Refer to paragraph 1.2, "Restoring Default Print Protocols".

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 6-3


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REMOTE PRINT EV DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

1.2 Restoring Default Print Protocols (EasyVision)


The below mentioned items are language dependent and may show up differently. The procedure described
keeps any existing print protocols.

1. Start the Customization tool.

2. In the screen area Print Protocols select under Application package Æ PCR Viewing.

3. Delete all standard print protocols, keep all customized print protocols and click [Save].

4. Exit the EV Customization tool and start it again.

5. Activate on the top bar Restore PMS settings and click [Save].

6. Select again PCR Viewing, all standard PMS print protocols plus all customized print protocols are now
available.

NOTE:
Modify print protocols require application-experience on the EasyVision, otherwise it may not work .
The existing “DD” protocols are tested and are working.

1.3 Setting up the systems

Preconditions

1. EasyVision RAD 4.2L6 (or higher) with the correct options running:
ÆSingle user
ÆEasyPCR
ÆEasyPrint

2. Both systems, the DigitalDiagnost and the EV RAD are installed properly and ready to operate on
the network.

3. Make sure no DICOM Print license is active on the DigitalDiagnost (Customization Manager).

6-4 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x EASY VISION PRINT

Survey of Actions:

Easy Vision:
ƒ Configuration tool: configure all sbus / DICOM printers
ƒ Set up the DICOM node
ƒ Load the DigitalDiagnost print layouts
ƒ Execute the configuration
ƒ On Exit the EasyVision automatically restarts in the proper way
(reboot or Start Menu)
ƒ Select the correct monitor (Check the EV Release Bulletin for details)

DigitalDiagnost:
ƒ Customization Manager:

Æ set the relevant network parameters of DigitalDiagnost (IPs, AETs etc..)


Æ no licence for DICOM Print (if EV Remote Print is used)
Æ Activate EasyVision Print

No License

Active !

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 6-5


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REMOTE PRINT EV DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

1.3.1 Setting up EasyVision RAD

1.3.1.1 Setting up a new EV DICOM Node

1. From the Startup menu select :

4 Go to Installation/Configuration Menu
2 Start Configuration

password = password

2. In the configuration tool window from the area of Configured nodes select DICOM node and click
[New]. The DICOM node configuration screen appears.

3. Enter the following data:

IP node name hostname of the DigitalDiagnost


IP address IP address of the DigitalDiagnost
Port number 3010, fixed for remote print
DICOM node system name name within the EasyVision user interface
Application Entity Title AET of the DigitalDiagnost
SCU settings select Store as SCU and deselect all
others.

Extended settings SCP The following items must be active for


Remote/Auto Print:
CR Image
allow private attributes !!
SCP settings
Deselect all !

4. Click [Proceed], then [Execute].

5. Make sure Keep existing local image


Database and Keep existing processing
presets are selected, then click [Confirm].

6. Reboot the EasyVision. The configured DICOM


node is now active.

SCU setting:
Only Store as SCU

6-6 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x EASY VISION PRINT

1.3.2 Setting up DigitalDiagnost

1.3.2.1 Setting up the DIDI DICOM node (s)

1. Local DICOM node DigitalDiagnost

Service Tool Æ System Configuration Æ DICOM Æ LOCAL

Figure 1-1, DigitalDiagnost LOCAL Node

2. ARCHIVE nodes DigitalDiagnost

Service Tool Æ Configuration Æ DICOM Æ Archive

Enter the connected Easy-Vision to the DICOM node list. Here as an example: “de25aa”

Figure 1-2: DICOM Archive/Print nodes

If Commit is set to YES make sure the node configuration for MPPS is set correctly !!

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 6-7


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REMOTE PRINT EV DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x

Item Selection Description/ Remarks


Remote AET de25aa DICOM Application Entity Title(AET) of the
EasyVision RAD; will not be sent to the
EasyVision and will not appear on its user
interface
User Interface Description Description shown in the User Interface
Description
Remote Host xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx IP address of the EV

Remote Port No. 3010 Port number of the EV

Export Filter None/filters DICOM Export Filter: Usually “none” for EV


Print.
Study Desc. Empty/Exam Item/SPS desc.

Active OFF (can be YES if only one Must not be set to YES for the EV Remote
node is inserted) print node
Only for autosending of DICOM images to
the Archiving system marked with “Active” =
Yes*
Commit No Storage Commitment

Exp. Prv. Att. Yes This needs to be set to YES when Remote
Export Private Attributes Print EV is used.
EV.Fwd.AET Yes/No AET of the receiving station.

CR/DX CR Always CR for EV Print

Secure Yes/No Currently no function

Encryption Yes/No Currently no function

Certificate Yes/No Currently no function

3. Synchronize the common print formats for EV and DIDI.

Get Printer List

This button downloads the


printer/format list from the
connected EasyVision.
Click this button at first.

Allow sub-sampled printing

NO:
The image is not sub-sampled
(scaled down) for printing.The
scale is kept to about 90%-100%.
YES: The image can be sub-
sampled to a lower ratio. Less
than 50% is possible.
This may lead to bad printing
quality if the printer resolution
is too low!

6-8 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost 1.5.x EASY VISION PRINT

Default Printer (Default printing format)

Select the smallest possible or available format/printer


It is recommended to use that one containing the smallest film-size. The printing process takes care to start
with the smallest possible film size and will take the next larger size in case the smallest does not fit.

Enable EasyVision Printing

Active : EasyVision printing is activated.


IN-Active : NO printing is active. Printing only via PACS.

1.4 Printing DigitalDiagnost images and PCR images on same Film


Using the EV remote print functionality both image types from DigitalDiagnost and from PCR can be printed
on the same film. In this case use the option “Patient name once “ which can be activated in the PCR print
format editor of the print tool.

The condition for this option to work properly is that all data elements listed below have to be identical for all
images to be printed on the same film:

DICOM_PATIENT_NAME DICOM_PATIENT_BIRTH_NAME
DICOM_PATIENT_ID SPI_PATIENT_ENTRY_ID
DICOM_PATIENT_BIRTHDATE DICOM_ACCESSION_NUMBER
DICOM_PATIENTS_BIRTH_TIME DICOM_INSTITUTIONAL_DEPARTMENT_NAME
DICOM_PATIENT_SEX DICOM_INSTITUTION_NAME
DICOM_OTHER_PATIENT_NAMES DICOM_MANUFACTURER

If the option “Patient name once” has been selected but one or more of the images printed on the same film
do not conform to another image regarding at least one of the data elements above listed the patient name is
not printed on the film at all. The name field on the film is filled with “ *** “. This film is not valid and cannot be
used.
An image can be temporarily printed out with the option “Patient name once” switched OFF. On this film the
patient name is printed on any of the images.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 6-9


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost UNIX BASICS
UNIX BASICS

DigitalDiagnost

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 3

2 How to access UNIX ................................................................................................................. 3

3 UNIX structure for files / directories / disks........................................................................... 3

4 File names ................................................................................................................................. 3

5 File types ................................................................................................................................... 4

6 Basic commands for directory handling................................................................................ 4

7 Basic commands for directory listing .................................................................................... 5

8 Basic commands for file manipulation................................................................................... 5

9 File access permissions .......................................................................................................... 6

10 Basic commands for changing the file access permissions ............................................... 7

11 Date command .......................................................................................................................... 9

12 Short-Cuts (aliases).................................................................................................................. 9

13 Filesystem DigitalDiagnost.................................................................................................... 11

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 7-1


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
UNIX BASICS DigitalDiagnost

7-2 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost UNIX BASICS

1 Introduction

Important Note

Due to security aspects the root / super user password will not be published anymore !!

2 How to access UNIX

To access the UNIX prompt in the DigitalDiagnost system UNIX can be started via either:

1. Command Tool
2. A service PC connected to the Ethernet connector (network) or
3. Remotely via modem/network/RSN

Passwords:

NOTE

Passwords and Product Licence Strings are confidential and are not published in this text. If they
are unknown please contact Philips Medical Systems, Hamburg, Germany.

1. Normal User sabre


2. Service service
3. Install (set-up)install

3 UNIX structure for files / directories / disks

The UNIX file system is a structure for organising information or data. The data is grouped into
named entities called files as follows:

Directory A special type of file containing information about other files and
directories.
All files and sub-directories are contained by the main directory named
root (/).
Sub-directory A directory contained within another directory.
A Sub-directory can contain files and more sub-directories.
File A container to store data.
Files can consist of memos, reports, graphics or other types of data.

4 File names

The filenames have these characteristics:


- Case sensitive
- NO extensions

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 7-3


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
UNIX BASICS DigitalDiagnost
- NO version numbers
A dot is just another character in the filename. Filenames that start with a dot are called dot-files, or
hidden files, because they are only be listed if the list command has the right option.
In referring to filenames, the following wild-cards can be used:
? Represents any single character.
• Matches any number of characters (including none).

5 File types

The UNIX system uses four types of files as follows:

Ordinary file This type of file is used to store data. It may contain binary data
(executable files, data files) or ASCII data (text files, script files).
Directory file This is a directory file and contains a list of files.
Symbolic link This is only a pointer to another file.
Device file Block type (e.g.: Tape drive).
Character type (e.g.: Terminal).

The Device Files are used to reference physical devices, such as terminals, printers, disks and tape
drives. They are read-from and written-to just like ordinary files, but such requests cause activation
of the associated physical device.

Unix uses two special directory files:

. This represents the working directory.


.. This is the parent directory to the working directory.

NOTE

The parent directory is the directory one level above the current working directory.

6 Basic commands for directory handling

Listed below are the basic commands for directory handling :

pwd Displays the path name of the current working directory.


cd or cd~ Changes working directory to login directory.
This is the home directory, which is specified in the password file for every user.
It is the home directory for the user sabre: /home/SABRE
cd .. Changes the working directory to the parent directory.

7-4 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost UNIX BASICS
cd /name Changes the working directory to a Sub-directory name.
The “name” is the name of the “file”.
mkdir This makes a directory.

NOTE

The addition of -p allows missing parent directories to be created as needed.

rmdir Removes a directory but ONLY an empty directory.


rm -r Deletes the contents of a directory, its sub-directories and the directory itself.
mv Renames the source directory to the destination directory.

7 Basic commands for directory listing

The ls command lists the contents of directories. The second way to use ls is to specify either the
absolute or the relative pathname of the target directory. This does not change directories. Listed
below are the basic commands for directory listing:

ls Lists all (non-hidden) files.


ls -F Put a slash (/) after each filename if the file is a directory.
Put an asterisk (*) after each filename if the file is executable.
Put an at-sign (@) after each filename if the file is a symbolic link.
ls -a Lists all files - including hidden files.
ls -aF Lists in a combined way the options -a and -F.
ls -l Lists the properties of each file. The list is in long format.
ls -lu Indicates the last time the file was accessed.
ls -s Gives the size of each file.
cp -r Copies files and sub-directories of a directory (source) to a second directory
(destination), along with its files and Sub-directory.

8 Basic commands for file manipulation

Listed below are the basic commands for file manipulation:

file Determine the file type (e.g. : file /etc/passwd). Displayed as “ASCII text".
cat Concatenates (i.e.: puts one file after another) and displays files on the screen.
Example: cat file1 file2 (file1 and file2 are displayed).
cat file1 file2 > file3 (file1 and file2 are written in file3)
more Displays the contents of a file one screen at a time.
page Pages through a text file.

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 7-5


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
UNIX BASICS DigitalDiagnost
view To view a file with the “vi” editor in the “read only” mode.
head Shows the first part (default 10 lines) of a file.
tail Shows the last part (default 10 lines) of a file.
cp Copies a file.
ln Creates a symbolic link for a file.
mv To move or to rename a file.
rm To remove a file.

NOTE

The addition of -i provides a prompt for confirmation.

9 File access permissions

There are three classes of file (system) user and three modes of file access offered by the UNIX file
system. This gives a total of nine different kinds of access permission.
The three classes of file (system) user are as follows:

Owner (or user) (u) The owner is usually the user who created the file.
The super-user can change the individual ownership of a file if
necessary.
The owner has full control over restricting or permitting access to the
file at any time.
The ownership of a file can be changed by the system administrator
with the “chown” command.
Group (g) A system user who is not the file owner may access the file, but only
if this user belongs to the group of system users who are allowed to
access the file.
However, this user cannot restrict or permit access to the file. Only
the owner is allowed to do this
Other (or world) (o) This category refers to any other user of the system.

There are three ways of accessing a file. The meaning of these access modes is different for files
than it is for directories as follows:

Files read Examine the contents (view, cat)


write Change the contents (vi)
Create and remove files (rm, vi, cp)
execute Use as a command (“filename”)

Directories read Examine the contents (ls)


write Create sub-directories (mkdir)
Change contents (rm)
execute Rights of passage (cd)
Exploration (cp)

7-6 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost UNIX BASICS

To determine the set of access permissions of a particular file the command ls -l can be used. This
gives a directory listing with the long listing option as follows:
# ls -l apple
rwxrwxrwx 1 erik 1024 Jun 20 10:05
apple

Where :
- The dash in the file type field indicates that the file is an ordinary file.

Other possibilities are:

d Directory file
l Symbolic link
b Block-type special (disk device)
c Character-type special (terminal type)
p Special “fifo” file (named "pipe")

Example 1 : rwxrwxrwx The first three characters (read, write and execute) in the access permissions
field gives the permission for the Owner.
The next three for the Group.
The last three for the Other.
If a specific permissions is not allowed, a dash (-) is placed at the that
position.
Example 2 : rwxr--r-- The file can be read, written to and executed by the user.
The file can be read by the group and the others.

1 The number of links for this file.


erik The file owner.
1024 The size of the file in bytes. For special files the device driver and the number
of units.
Jun 20 10:05 The date and time when the file was last changed (modification time).
apple The filename.

10 Basic commands for changing the file access permissions

NOTE

Some files can only be accessed with super-user permissions .

Listed below are the basic commands for file access permissions:

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 7-7


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
UNIX BASICS DigitalDiagnost
touch Updates the access and modification times of a file.
chmod Changes the mode and the file access permission (absolute and symbolic mode).
chown Changes the owner of a file (only root can do this Æ Not allowed anymore).
chgrp Changes the group ownership of a file.

To change permissions of a file, these abbreviations are used:

u User (owner) permissions.


g Group permissions.
o Others (world) permissions.
a All of user, group and others permissions.
= Assign a permission absolutely.
+ Add a permission.
- Take away a permission.

Example 1 : chmod a=rwx apple


(As ame as: chmod 777 apple)
ls -ld apple
drwxrwxrwx 1 erik 17 Nov 9 21:40 apple

Example 2 : chmod g-rwx,o-rwx apple


ls -ld apple
drwx------ 1 erik 17 Nov 9 21:45 apple

7-8 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost UNIX BASICS

11 Date command

Due to security aspects the date cannot be changed any longer on UNIX level (no root access !)
Use the Customization Manager instead.

To display the current date/time/time zone at the command prompt:

type in: date <return>

Date display format (example) : Mon Jan 24 09:39:46 MET 2006

12 Short-Cuts (aliases)

cd /export/home/SABRE / home directory of SABRE

cdC /export/home/SABRE/DATA/CALIBRATION calibration Directory

cdL ..DATA/LOG Logfile directory


cdP ..DATA/PRE_IMAGES PRE Image directory
cdPO ..DATA/POST_IMAGES Post Image directory
cdR ..DATA/RAW_IMAGES RAW Images directory
cdV ..DATA/VERI_IMAGES Verification directory
cdS ..SABRE/SYSTEM/SERVICE Service Directory (contains
transfer)
cdSRC ..SABRE/SYSTEM/ALI_SRC not relevant for service
cdTST ..DATA/ALI_TST not relevant for service
cdT ..SABRE/DATA/TRANSFER Change to TRANSFER directory

h history
ll list long
tx texteditor ( usage: tx filename)
filemgr& opens the filemanager on windows surface (=>/usr/openwin/bin/filemgr)
balu opens the image viewer (like xdisplay)
sdtimage& Opens a graphic/snapshot tool

NOTE

The path /export/home/SABRE/DATA = /GIGA_DISK1/DATA

Starting filemanager / texteditor

1. Filemanager

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 7-9


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
UNIX BASICS DigitalDiagnost
Open a commandtool:
Type in: filemgr& <return>

2. Texteditor

Open a commandtool:
Type in: tx& <return>

7-10 CSIP Level 1 (06.0) DigitalDiagnost Workstation


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost

13 Filesystem DigitalDiagnost

In the DigitalDiagnost system some


directories are specific for the use in
DigitalDiagnost.
To have an overview the following structure
is given:

Figure 13-1, File System DigitalDiagnost

DigitalDiagnost Workstation CSIP Level 1 (06.0) 7-11


© 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES ...............................................MODULE CODE NUMBER: 4512 983 11811

7-1 ... 7-32 (06.0)

DICOM DigitalDiagnost Release 1.5.x

Contents
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 What is covered by this manual: ............................................................................................... 3
1.2 DICOM general information ...................................................................................................... 3

2 Preparation .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.1 Network requirements ............................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Quick Network Check................................................................................................................ 4
2.3 Set-Up Network Speed (Installation Manager) ......................................................................... 4
2.4 Network set-up local system (DigitalDiagnost) ......................................................................... 6

3 DICOM node set-ups............................................................................................................... 7


3.1 DICOM Archive Nodes.............................................................................................................. 8
3.2 DICOM BWLM Node................................................................................................................. 9
3.3 DICOM MPPS node .................................................................................................................. 9
3.4 DICOM IMS Node (Storage Commit)........................................................................................ 9
3.5 LOCAL Node (AETitle / Port) .................................................................................................. 10
3.6 DICOM VERIFY ...................................................................................................................... 11

4 DICOM general settings (Unstructured Items) ................................................................... 11


4.1 DICOM General....................................................................................................................... 12
4.2 DICOM MPPS ......................................................................................................................... 12
4.3 DICOM Storage Commit ......................................................................................................... 12

5 DICOM RIS (BWLM)............................................................................................................... 13


5.1 Set-Up the BWLM node .......................................................................................................... 13
5.2 Unstructured Items: Group : DICOM BWLM........................................................................... 13
5.3 DICOM Code Mapping (BWLM RIS) ...................................................................................... 14
5.3.1 Enter the Anatomical Database (ADB) ................................................................................... 14
5.3.2 Manual Create a Code & Map The code ................................................................................ 15
5.3.3 Mapping a RIS code to an Examination via RIS Query .......................................................... 19
5.4 DICOM Code Mapping relation: .............................................................................................. 21
5.5 DICOM codes and their DICOM tag code............................................................................... 21
5.6 RIS Sent To PCR .................................................................................................................... 22

6 DICOM Export Filter (s)......................................................................................................... 23


6.1 Set-Up ..................................................................................................................................... 23
6.2 Explanations of Functions ....................................................................................................... 24
6.3 Explanation of Modes ( DICOM Export Filter)......................................................................... 25
6.3.1 DICOM Display Standard (DDS)............................................................................................. 25
6.3.1.1 Export Filter Set-Up ............................................................................................................. 25
6.3.2 Measure Mode ........................................................................................................................ 26
6.3.2.1 Measure Mode Set Up......................................................................................................... 26
6.3.3 Film like ................................................................................................................................... 29
6.3.3.1 Film Like Set-Up .................................................................................................................. 29
6.3.4 Full Range ............................................................................................................................... 30
6.3.4.1 Full Range Set-Up ............................................................................................................... 30

7 DICOM Workflow ................................................................................................................... 31

8 Trouble Shooting .................................................................................................................. 32


4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-1
(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 2-1, Cutomization Manager : Net ...............................................................................................6


Figure 3-1, DICOM configuration main screen......................................................................................7
Figure 3-3, DICOM Archive Nodes........................................................................................................8
Figure 3-4, DICOM BWLM Node...........................................................................................................9
Figure 3-5, DICOM MPPS Nodes..........................................................................................................9
Figure 3-6, DICOM IMS (Storage Commit) Nodes................................................................................9
Figure 3-7, DICOM LOCAL node ........................................................................................................10
Figure 3-8, DICOM VERIFY ................................................................................................................11
Figure 4-1, Unstructured Items............................................................................................................11
Figure 4-2, Unstructured Items Group: DICOM General.....................................................................12
Figure 4-3, Unstructured Items Group: DICOM MPPS .......................................................................12
Figure 4-4, Unstructured Items Group: DICOM Storage Commit .......................................................12
Figure 5-1, Unstructured Items Group: DICOM BWLM.......................................................................13
Figure 5-5, Internal workflow "Send To PCR" .....................................................................................22
Figure 6-2, DICOM Export General .....................................................................................................24
Figure 6-6, TIC Tool.............................................................................................................................27
Figure 7-1 , DICOM Workflow .............................................................................................................31
Figure 7-2, Network Peripherals..........................................................................................................32

7-2 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 WHAT IS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL:

Basic network set-up


DICOM Node set-up
MPPS, Storage Commit
DICOM BWLM/RIS set-up (RIS Mapping)
DICOM Export Filter set-up

DICOM Print is covered by a separate manual: Refer to : “UNIT Manual “DICOM Print”.

1.2 DICOM GENERAL INFORMATION

DICOM is the agreed standard set by ACR-NEMA to transmit / receive data via a network in medical
applications. The conversion of the data from DigitalDiagnost to a DICOM is completed within DigitalDiagnost
itself.

DICOM
is an abbreviation for Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine.

ACR-NEMA
is an abbreviation for Association of Computed Radiographers - National Electrical Manufacturers
Association.

DICOM divides the transmitted data into two (2) parts, the Header and the Data. Within the Header there are
Groups and Elements that each have an individual and constant meaning. The same Group / Element
combination ALWAYS have the same meaning and therefore action for the transmitted data.

Example 1
Group / Element (0000,0000): This always defines the depth of the Header and
the combined Data.
Example 2
Group / Element (0010,0010): This always defines the Patient’s Name.

Other Group / Element combinations define the Networking conditions, the functions, type of image, etc.. For
the type of image, there is a further breakdown to define what to do with the Image (e.g. : ”Store”, ”Print”,
etc.). For DIGITALDIAGNOST (at the time of printing) only the ”Store” definition is used. This is defined
further as either ”Archive” or ”Viewing”. DIGITALDIAGNOST supports the Class ”CR” (Computed
Radiography) within DICOM. Refer to the DICOM Conformance Statement (part of this manual).

NOTE

Only ”Post-Images” can be ”Stored” and ”Viewed”


(according to Class ”CR” as used by DigitalDiagnost).
Exception: DICOM store to EasyVision RAD. This can be Pre-Images

For more details also refer to DigitalDiagnost Conformance Statements (s) and the DICOM standard:

DICOM Conformance Statements:


http://www.medical.philips.com/main/company/connectivity/x-ray/index.html

DICOM Standard:

http://pww.medicalit.ms.philips.com/io/

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-3


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

2 PREPARATION

2.1 NETWORK REQUIREMENTS


Connection via standard ethernet connector. 10/100/100 MB Network.

2.2 QUICK NETWORK CHECK

IP-Address “PING”

From the COMMAND TOOL:

Use the „ping“ command to check if the IP address you want to connect to is alive:

1. Open a command tool

2. Type in: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx <return>


(xxx.xxx..... is the valid IP address or hostname)

The message „xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx“ is alive tells you the connection to network is working. It does not mean
DICOM/RIS are working. This has to be defined in the configurations.

In addition a DICOM VERIFY (refer to section 3.6 DICOM VERIFY) checks for activ/valid DICOM nodes. This
is limited the the nodes which are already configured. Also refer to section Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte
nicht gefunden werden. DICOM Configuration

2.3 SET-UP NETWORK SPEED (INSTALLATION MANAGER)

Logout the application software:

SYSTEM STOP LOGOUT

Login as “Install”

7-4 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

INSTALLATION MANAGER

1) Re-Installation of the Application Package


2) Start Customization Manager
3) Configure Network Driver
4) Start SUNvts (Hardware Analysis)
5) Review installation logs
6) Review Freeware Software Licences
7) Language Management
8) Add Extension Level
9) Upgrade Reader Software
10) Quit

3 <Return>

3) Configure Network Driver

Select the correct setting according to the connected network.


The standard/default setting is “auto” and is usually correct. If another setting is required select
one of the other possibilities.

network configuration
*************************
1 Auto AutoNegotiation
2 10HD 10 MPS, half-duplex
3 10FD 10 Mbps, full-duplex
4 100HD 100 Mbps, half-duplex
5 100FD 100 Mbps, full-duplex
6 1000HD 1000 Mbps, half-duplex
7 1000FD 1000 Mbps, full-duplex
8 Quit Return to previous menu
Please select item (default: 1) [1-6,?]

2) Start Customization Manager

This starts the Customization Manager.

Proceed with the section below to set up the network.

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-5


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

2.4 NETWORK SET-UP LOCAL SYSTEM (DIGITALDIAGNOST)

To reach the Customization Manager please do the following:

NET

Figure 2-1, Cutomization Manager : Net

7-6 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

3 DICOM NODE SET-UPS

The DICOM configuration items are now including set-up screens for additional features. The availability
depends on the customer’s environment and the ordered options.

ARCHIVE Nodes
BWLM Node
MPPS Node
IMS Node
LOCAL node (DIDI)

All items are now grouped in one start screen. The DICOM Export Filter, is still separated from this screen:

Figure 3-1, DICOM configuration main screen

This screen is used to set the DICOM nodes for all the DICOM peripherals (except DICOM Print) and the
local DICOM settings.

DICOM Storage(C_Store):
This generally activated the DICOM storage
to the defined device.
Storage Commit
When supported by the customer’s
environment, this item can be activated.
Local Storage (DICOM Media)
Local storage to MOD/CDROM . DX or CR
Can be activated for24h when no license
present.
Default format is : DR. Also possible to
select DX. Depends on customer’s local
environment

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-7


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

3.1 DICOM ARCHIVE NODES

Figure 3-2, DICOM Archive Nodes

Item Selection Description/ Remarks

Remote AET xxxxxx AETitle of the remote device

User Interface yyyyyy Description shown in the User Interface


Description
Remote Host zzzzzz IP address of the remote device

Remote Port No. xxxx Port number of the remote device

Export Filter None/filters DICOM Export Filter (refer to Export Filter


Set-Up See below)
Study Desc. Empty/Exam Item/SPS desc. See below

Active Yes/No

Commit Yes/No Storage Commitment

Exp. Prv. Att. Yes/No This needs to be set to YES when Remote
Print EV is used.
Export Private Attributes
Usually: NO
EV.Fwd.AET Yes/No AET of the receiving Easy Vision

CR/DX CR/DX Selection of CR / DX standard.


Usually: CR.
If the customers environment requires DX it
needs to be set here.
Secure Yes/No Currently no function

Encryption Yes/No Currently no function

Certificate Yes/No Currently no function

Study description

This selection select if the Study Description is sent with the image:

“Empty” No Study Description is send with the image.


“Examination Description” The Examination Description is send with the
image. (ClassicRIS & BWLM)
“SPS Description” The SPS Description is send with the image.
(originally sent be BWLM)

7-8 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

3.2 DICOM BWLM NODE

Figure 3-3, DICOM BWLM Node

3.3 DICOM MPPS NODE

Figure 3-4, DICOM MPPS Nodes

3.4 DICOM IMS NODE (STORAGE COMMIT)

This is the node from which the Storage Commit information is received from the DigitalDiagnost. This is an
active process with the responsibility of DigitalDiagnost. (IMS = Image Management Service).

Important NOTE

If Storage Commit is activated it is required that the customer environment is surely answering Storage
Commit requests. If not, DiDi queues will run full and images cannot be deleted until the commitment is
received!! This may run into “disk full” status.

Figure 3-5, DICOM IMS (Storage Commit) Nodes

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-9


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

IMS Nodes can only / must only be used when Storage Commit is activated.

Field Selection / Input Description/ Remarks

Remote AETitle XXXX AETitle of the remote device

User Interface XXXX Description shown in the User Interface


Description
Remote Host xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx IP address of the remote device

Remote Port No. xxxx Port number of the remote device

Active Yes/No Activate/deactivate the node.

Secure Yes/No Currently no function

Encryption Yes/No Currently no function

Certificate Yes/No Currently no function

3.5 LOCAL NODE (AETITLE / PORT)

This is the usual node for DigitalDiagnost. (The port number can be different to 3000)

Figure 3-6, DICOM LOCAL node

7-10 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

3.6 DICOM VERIFY

When all the required DICOM nodes have been activated, use the DICOM VERIFY to basically check if they
are accessible.

1 DICOM VERIFY is an extended DICOM “ping”. Clicking


this button 2 will check the connected network for the
2 selected UI (AET/ description ) 1 .
Make sure the DICOM nodes are correctly configured!

- IP address/AET correct ?
- Configuration correct ?
- Is it an active Dicom node ??

The following main messages may appear:

“Succeeded”
• Verified DICOM node is alive
“No Connection”:
• Incomplete configuration on DigitalDiagnost
• TCP / IP protocol failed
“Rejected”:
• Association Negotiation failed
• Analyze VERIFICATION response: status failed
Figure 3-7, DICOM VERIFY

NOTE

If the UI Description contains “spaces”, the verify process cannot succeed.

4 DICOM GENERAL SETTINGS (UNSTRUCTURED ITEMS)

Figure 4-1, Unstructured Items

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-11


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

4.1 DICOM GENERAL

NAME Value Description


ArchiveRetryCount 1000 2. The number of retries the archiver executes for every
storage operation.
ArchiveRetryTimeout 100 The time (in 1/10 seconds) the archiver waits between retries of
storage operations.
DICOMArtimTimeout 20 2. Number of seconds waiting for an association request or
for the peer to shut down an association.
DICOMAssocReplyTimeout 20 Number of seconds waiting for a reply to an association request
or an association release.
DICOMResponseTimeout 15 Number of seconds waiting for a response.
StationID Digital Diagnost DICOM label identifying the machine that generated the digital
image (0008,1010).
StoLocalIOD DX Local Storage Image Object Definition (CR/DX)
UnprocessedExport no Export DICOM images unprocessed / processed (yes/no)

Figure 4-2, Unstructured Items Group: DICOM General

4.2 DICOM MPPS

NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION


MppsRetryCount 1000 Max. number of MPPS retries.
MppsRetryInterval 60 Number of seconds between MPPS retries.

Figure 4-3, Unstructured Items Group: DICOM MPPS

4.3 DICOM STORAGE COMMIT

NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION


StCommitNActionDelay 0 Number of seconds to delay a storage commit request.
StCommitNEventTimeout 0 Number of seconds waiting for a N-Event report in a same
association.
StCommitRetryCount -1 Number of storage commitment request retries (no limit = -1).
StCommitRetryTimeout 30 Number of seconds between storage commitment request
retries.

Figure 4-4, Unstructured Items Group: DICOM Storage Commit

7-12 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

5 DICOM RIS (BWLM)

BWLM (Basic Worklist Management)


The actualization of the work list is an active process on the DigitalDiagnost. The interval is default set to 60
sec. Every 60 sec DIDI fetches an update of the work list from the RIS server (BroadTimeInterval). For more
details about the RIS please refer to the UNIT manual RIS.

5.1 SET-UP THE BWLM NODE

Refer to DICOM nodes set-up. See section above.

5.2 UNSTRUCTURED ITEMS: GROUP : DICOM BWLM

NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION


AETWildCard no Supporting query wildcard (* and ?) for the broad query input field AETitle.
AETWildCardExpr AET (local) wildcard expression for the broad query, e.g. "DIDI*".
BackgroundQuery no Run the periodic background broad query (yes/no).
BroadAET yes The Digital Diagnost AET Title is included as matching key in the broad query
(yes/no).
BroadDate no Run the broad query with date matching (yes/no).
BroadMaxItems 1000 If a broad query returns more items, only the first <max items> are evaluated (1 -
1200).
BroadModality no The Modality type is included as matching key in the broad query (yes/no).
BroadTimeInterval 60 Time interval for background broad queries (10-3600 seconds).
BroadUITimeout 30 The max. time (seconds) of the UI query panel waiting for response status (via TT).
DateRange today Set the date matching type if the DateKey is set to yes (today/today or later/today or
earlier).
ModalityType CR Matching key value in broad or patient query, to be agreed with RIS admin.
(CR/DX/CR+DX).
PatientAET yes The Digital Diagnost AET Title is included as matching key in the patient query
(yes/no).
PatientAccessionNo yes The accession number is included in the patient query window (yes/no).
PatientDICOMName yes Patient Name is only one entry field, expecting DICOM-format
(FamillyName^FirstName).
PatientDate no Run the patient query (internally) with date matching (yes/no).
PatientID yes The Patient ID is included in the patient query window (yes/no).
PatientMaxItems 100 If a patient query returns more items, only the first <max items> are evaluated (1 -
1200).
PatientModality no The Modality type is included in the patient query (yes/no).
PatientName yes The Patient Name is included in the patient query window (yes/no).
PatientNameWildCard no Supporting query wildcard (* and ?) for the query input field patient name.
PatientReqProcID yes The Requested Procedure Id is included in the patient query window (yes/no).
PatientUITimeout 30 The max. time (seconds) of the UI query panel waiting for response status (via TT).

Figure 5-1, Unstructured Items Group: DICOM BWLM

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-13


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

5.3 DICOM CODE MAPPING (BWLM RIS)

The DICOM code mapping is part of the Anatomical Database (ADB) Tool.

There are three ways that new RIS codes can be imported to the DIDI database:

1. Manually
2. Via RIS Query & manual mapping
3. By recognizing a new code automatically (risconn process) & manual mapping

5.3.1 ENTER THE ANATOMICAL DATABASE (ADB)

Service Tools Set-Up Anatomical Database DICOM Mapping

The DICOM Code Mapping defines which item (DICOM Code), delivered from the hospital RIS, and is going
to select the required Examination from DigitalDiagnost.

Create & Map a code can be performed manually OR via the RIS Query..

NOTE:
The RIS Query requires a functional RIS connection.

7-14 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

5.3.2 MANUAL CREATE A CODE & MAP THE CODE


The example listed below shows how to create and map manually a Protocol Code to an Examination.
For a Requested Procedure Code the procedure is the same.

STEP1
Select the “master” DICOM Mapping Item:

This master DICOM Mapping Item has to be defined according to the customers requirements.

Select the TAB “DICOM Mapping”


Click: “Select Mapping Item” & Select
Click: “OK”

Possible DICOM Mapping Items :

• RQ Protocol Code
• SPS Description
• RQ Procedure Code
• RQ Procedure Description

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-15


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

STEP2

Create a new code (in our case a “Protocol Code”)

1. Click on “Add code”


2. In the pop-up screen: Enter a new code OK

The new Protocol Code is now in the list of codes and can be mapped to an Examination.
The indicates that the code is currently not mapped.

7-16 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

STEP3
ADD mapping (example: Protocol Code)

Map “Protocol Code” to an Examination.

Click on “ Add mapping”


Select the required Examination from the list to map it.
Click “Apply”

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-17


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

After the Protocol Code has been mapped to an Examination the screens look like this:

The chain symbol indicates:


The code is now mapped to an
Examination

The yellow colored files


indicate that one or more codes are
linked to that Examination.
The codes are shown below the
Examination.

The procedure to create/map other DICOM Mapping Items is similar.

7-18 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

5.3.3 MAPPING A RIS CODE TO AN EXAMINATION VIA RIS QUERY

Make sure all relevant set-ups are performed to use the connected RIS server !!

STEP1
Select the “master” DICOM Mapping Item:

This master DICOM Mapping Item has to be defined according to the customers requirements.

Select the TAB “DICOM Mapping”


Click: “Select Mapping Item” & Select
Click: “OK”

STEP 2

RIS Query

Click on “RIS Query” and wait until the codes are downloaded from the RIS server.

NOTE:

Only those codes can be downloaded which are currently available for DIDI. The RIS Query needs to be
repeated until ALL codes are downloaded and mapped.

1. Click on „RIS Query“ ( Check the network/DICOM parameters)


2. Filter via the Local AET
3. Click on „Start Search“
4. Wait until the Query is finished.

5. Import ALL codes or only the selected codes (Confirm the pop-up with: OK)
6. Proceed as locally required

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-19


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

Start Search = “RIS Query”

confirm

Import All New (received) codes.


Or
Import Selection (only selected) codes

The imported codes are


shown in the list.
In this case
“Scheduled Proc. Code” .

= un-linked

= linked
To map the imported code
to an Examination with
double click to the
Double click Examination column:

From the “Examination


list” which pops-up select
the required Examination.

7-20 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

5.4 DICOM CODE MAPPING RELATION:

Any code can be mapped to n-Examinations. Any Examination can be mapped by n-codes

RQ Procedure RQ Procedure SPS Protocol Code Examination


Description Code Description Item
n:n

n:n

n:n

n:n

5.5 DICOM CODES AND THEIR DICOM TAG CODE

Which DICOM tag contains the correct DICOM Code


Mapping code?
DICOM Tags:
Protocol Code (0040,0008)
SPS Description (0040,0007)
RQ Procedure Description (0032,1060)
RQ Procedure Code (0032,1064)

Table 1, DICOM Code Mapping (DICOM tags)

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-21


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

5.6 RIS SENT TO PCR

Activate “Send to PCR” in the Customization Manager.

Mount point (Send to PCR)


Only possible if a RIS (classic FTP or BWLM) system is connected!
This input defines the directory to where the RIS data has to be transferred:

Structure (example): IP:pathi.e.: 130.143.182.49:/data/ris/input (EXAMPLE !!)

This function can be used to combine examinations of


one patient made on DigitalDiagnost and additional as a
free cassette examination (or conventional wall
examination) with PCR.

The different images can be merged on Easy Vision. The


image from DigitalDiagnost has to be sent via DICOM.
The PCR image is already on the Easy Vision. Refer to
the Easy Vision Manual to configure the merge function.

Send to PCR cannot be used for PCR ELEVA systems!!!

Figure 5-5, Internal workflow "Send To PCR"

7-22 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

6 DICOM EXPORT FILTER (S)

6.1 SET-UP
The DICOM Export Filter Editor can be selected directly from the Service Tool button.

Based on the post processed image data, this special filter is designed to synchronize the HCU output and the
several outputs on different monitors (Viewing stations, i.e. Easy Vision).
The filters generic_mono1 and generic_mono2 are defaults. To create a new filter type, always use Add or
Copy to proceed. Already created filters are shown
in this list. They can be modified with Edit.
The filter names (defaults or customized filters) can
be selected later on in the DICOM archive set-up.

Figure 6-1 , DICOM Export Filter Selection

Opens a new screen to add/create another filter.


Add

Edits an existing filter. It can be stored with a new name. The default filters cannot
Edit
be edited. Use the Copy function instead.

Copies an existing filter with a new name.


Copy

Commits the modifications and exits the filter editor.


OK

Save the modifications.


Save

Cancels all modifications and keeps the old settings.


Cancel

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-23


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

Selection of mode: Monochrome Filter name. BIT depth


Full Range switch: This name is re- of the transferred
Film Like 1 or 2 selected in DICOM image.
Measure Mode Net Options
Greylevel Display STD (previous screen).

Luminescence
sliders.

Brightness Press Save to Resulting Curve Shape.


slider. store Defined by the
modifications. luminescence sliders.

Figure 6-2, DICOM Export General

6.2 EXPLANATIONS OF FUNCTIONS


Mode selection of the operating mode:

• DICOM DISPLAY_STD (= DICOM Greyscale Display Standard)


• Measure (optional)
• Film Like
• Full Range

NOTE

The DISPLAY_STD and Measure Mode are optional.


They are only available if the option “DISPLAY_STD” is installed.

Monochrome
Selects between Monochrome 1 and 2 (in all modes except DICOM Display Standard).
This switch influences the DICOM element „Photometric Interpretation“, thus the bit representation of
the pixel data (inverse). To decide what to pick check with the vendor of the receiving station.
Normally the majority of receiving stations can handle both in which case the setting does not matter.
If the image on the receiving station appears to be black/white inverted, select the other setting.

Bit Depth
Selects the bit depth of the output. Values are 15, 12, 10 or 8 bit. Experiences show that reduction
down to 10 bit are not visible under normal viewing circumstances. However, special cases (high
zooming on small details) might require a higher bit depth. Reduction to 8 bit should be used with care
because interpolation artifacts are visible.

7-24 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

6.3 EXPLANATION OF MODES ( DICOM EXPORT FILTER)

6.3.1 DICOM DISPLAY STANDARD (DDS)

This mode is the preferred one


whenever the receiving station can
operate the DICOM DISPLAY
GREYLEVEL STANDARD (= DDS
= DISPLAY_STD)). Set mode
switch to DISPLAY_STD and bit
depth and MONOCHROME
switch to the required value.

Figure 6-3, DICOM Display Standard (DDS)

NOTE

The Luminescence sliders do not work for this filter type.

6.3.1.1 Export Filter Set-Up

Procedure to set-up a filter for DDS.

1. Enter the Service Tool.


2. Select: SET-UP / DICOM Export Filter. This
opens the DICOM Export Filter Selection.
3. Select Add. This opens DICOM Export Filter
Editor (see above screen).
4. Set the bit depth and the monochrome switch
(photometric interpretation) to the required value.
(->Conformance Statement of the receiving
station)
5. Modify the brightness slider to optimize the
output.
6. Enter a new name for this filter.
Figure 6-4 , DICOM Export Filter Selection 7. Click OK & Save to store the settings.

Make sure to have this filter selected under DICOM Archive Nodes. Restart the system after all modifications
are finished.

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-25


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

6.3.2 MEASURE MODE

The Measure Mode should be the


preferred one whenever DDS is not
available.
Using this mode the export filter does
two operations:

1. Applying a calibration curve to


the output station (similar to the
HCU calibration).
2. Applying a perceptual linear
lookup curve.

In other words, it simulates a DDS link


to a receiver that is not DDS
compatible.

Figure 6-5, DICOM Export (Measure Mode)

6.3.2.1 Measure Mode Set Up

Tools required:

Luminescence meter to measure the monitor output (cd/m²).

1. Enter the Service Tool:


Set-Up Configuration DICOM Configuration

2. Set-Up the required network & DICOM settings. (Node configuration)


Select none for Export Filter Name. (This is only for the following calibration. Needs to be set back after
calibration)

3. Click Save & OK.

4. Restart the system ( System / Stop / wait for the Process Control Tool and click Restart ).

5. Re-enter the Service Tool

6. Click on the Testimage button below the section Acceptance.


This starts the TIC Tool ( Test Image Creation Tool ).
For details please refer to the separate UNIT manual TIC Tool.

7. TIC: Activate “Display Images”.1

8. TIC: Select wanted image size. Usually keep the default. 2

9. TIC: Select “assign Test Image to Testpatient”. This is default set to active. Leave it ! 3

10. TIC: In “Image Types” select “Linearity Test” 4 and click on Create Images. 5

11. TIC: Enter the Viewer 6and print/store the image. The viewer is the same as used for patient images.

7-26 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

1 2 4

3 6

Figure 6-6, TIC Tool


12. TIC: Click EXIT to leave that tool
PRINT

PRINT

13. Enter the Viewer


14. Select the image
15. In the Viewer: Click: “Print” to enter the print tool / (Or Click: Store (eg. PACS))
16. In the print tool: Move the image into the Viewport
17. In the print tool: Click the print icon

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-27


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

18. Measure the 9 fields on film / (monitor)

In the DICOM EXPORT FILTER:

19. Enter: Service Tool : Set-Up / DICOM Export Filter.

20. Create a new filter with Add.

21. With the Mode switch select MEASURE.

22. Set-Up bit depth and MONOCHROME switch (photometric interpretation) as required
(Also refer to DICOM Conformance Statement).

23. Enter the noted values ( 12.) into the slider value fields (cd/m²).
Each slider value input must be confirmed with <enter / return> !

NOTE:

The most left field represents the dark image area, the most right field represents the light image area. The
brightness slider has no influence for this filter type.

24. Enter a new Export Filter Name

25. Click OK & Save to confirm and save the modifications

26. Make sure the new filter is also selected/activated in the related DICOM node

27. Restart the system to activate the settings

7-28 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

6.3.3 FILM LIKE


NOTE:

It is recommended to use the DICOM Display Standard or Measure Mode instead of FILM LIKE !!

If you cannot use one of the above modes,


you may also adjust the 9 sliders just by “try
and error”.
The Film Like Mode then applies this curve to
the output data without changing the
histogram width.

Figure 6-7, DICOM Export (Film_like)

6.3.3.1 Film Like Set-Up


1. Take a lung image on film that was reported to be “good”.
2. Now adjust the sliders so that the lungs on film and on screen look similar.

NOTE:

-> After every change you have to save and restart before re-transmitting the post image.
-> On the x-axis, dark values are on the left, light values are on the right.
-> On the y-axis, dark values are at the bottom, light values are on the top.
This means, for example, to darken light areas of an image (abdomen in a lung image), move
the upper right part of the curve more down.
-> Do not change the values of the first and last slider.

3. Set the bit depth and MONOCHROME switch (photometric interpretation) according to your needs.

According to the experience so far, “good” curves kind of look like a “banana”.
After aligning the curve for a lung image all other anatomical regions should produce satisfactory results as
well.

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-29


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

6.3.4 FULL RANGE

NOTE:

It is recommended to use the DICOM Display Standard or Measure Mode instead of this filter type.

The Full Range Mode is quite similar


to the Film-Like mode. The only
difference is that the actual
histogram range is always expanded
to the full possible data range.
Even though this seems to be a
remarkable benefit because the
contrast of each picture is enhanced
compared to “Film-Like”, the user
MUST be aware that this mode
expands each image differently.
This includes the following danger: The
same patient, examined twice with
different collimation (-> more direct
radiation in one image) expands
differently. For the viewer this results in
the same patient having completely
different contrast appearance. A
comparison study is much more
Figure 6-8, DICOM EXPORT (Full Range) complicated and may result in wrong or
inaccurate report!

6.3.4.1 Full Range Set-Up

1. Take a lung image on film that was reported to be “good”.

2. Now adjust the sliders so that the lung on film and on screen look similar.

3. Set the bit depth and MONOCHROME switch (photometric interpretation) according to your needs.

NOTE:

-> After every change you have to save and restart before re-transmitting the post image.
-> On the x-axis, dark values are on the left, light values are on the right.
-> On the y-axis, dark values are at the bottom, light values are on the top.
This means, for example, to darken light areas of an image (abdomen in a lung image), move
the upper right part of the curve more down.
-> Do not change the values of the first and last slider.

According to the experience so far, “good” curves kind of look like a “banana”.
After aligning the curve for a lung image all other anatomical regions should produce satisfactory results as
well.

7-30 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

7 DICOM WORKFLOW

Hospital
Hospital NET
NET DigitalDiagnost
DigitalDiagnost EXAMUI
storage to HIS_IN
(patient list)
BWLM
(DICOM RIS)

C_find / worklist qeuery BWLM SCU HIS_IN

fetch from HIS_IN


MPPS update
N_create (Examination initiated)
MPPS SCU
MPPS
N_set (Examination finished)
risConn

DICOM Print HIS_REJECT


DICOM Printer basic greyscale print management
Print SCU

data storage

DataBase DIDI
PACS / ARCHIV DataBase DIDI
C-store (IMAGE) Archiver
Storage SCU

Storage Commit request

N_action request

N_event report

IMS
Workflow Manager
C_ECHO to AET (i.e. IMS) VERIFY DICOM "ping" DICOM DICOM Agent
Verification Storage Commit SCU
answer Verification SCP
SCU

any C_ECHO VERIFY from "outside")

AET answer DICOM workflow


V:\Innovatn\Digital Diagnost\Dokumentation\
Release1_4\DiDiWorkstation1_4\UNITS\Dicom1_4\
DigitalDiagnost
VISIO\

Figure 7-1 , DICOM Workflow

4512 983 11811 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-31


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

D
I
G
I
T
A
L
D I A G N O S T

IDC IDC

Figure 7-2, Network Peripherals

8 TROUBLE SHOOTING
To assist in correcting problems that may occur between DigitalDiagnost and the Network some useful
references are given below. When a particular problem occurs the references are to be used in the order
given under each heading. This is to make sure that all interactions within the system are completed correctly
and therefore conflicts are eliminated.

In case of messages like: “Network Error” or “DICOM Error” or similar check all settings for Customization
Manager, DICOM Nodes, DICOM Export Filters .
If strange messages appear check also the contents of the “archive.log” and the “Append_archive.log”.

Logfiles are in .../DATA/LOG/... and /DATA/LOG/DICOM

A special logfile is created for BWLM (worklist management): BWLMscu.Log

The use of DPM (DICOM Protocol Monitor) in combination with a “Sniffer” can be helpful to analyze the image
transfer and referring messages on the network.

Also use the DICOM VERIFY ! Refer to Section 3.6 (DICOM VERIFY).

7-32 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11811


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES ...............................................MODULE CODE NUMBER: 4512 983 11821

7-1 ... 7-26 (06.0)

DICOM PRINT DigitalDiagnost Release 1.5.x

Contents
1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 Manual history............................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Getting started .............................................................................................................................. 2
1.3 Installation (license key) ............................................................................................................... 2

2 Configuration for printing:......................................................................................................... 3


2.1 Basic Examination set-up for printing ........................................................................................... 3
2.2 HCU Configuration Tool................................................................................................................ 3
2.2.1 How to enter .............................................................................................................................. 3
2.2.2 “General Items” tab: ................................................................................................................. 5
2.2.3 “Printers” tab:............................................................................................................................. 7
2.2.4 „String Groups” tab:................................................................................................................... 8
2.2.5 „Font sets“ tab ........................................................................................................................... 8
2.2.6 “Templates” tab ......................................................................................................................... 9

3 HCU Calibration (DICOM PRINT) ............................................................................................. 16


3.1 How to start................................................................................................................................. 16
3.2 HCU Grey Level Calibration ....................................................................................................... 16
3.2.1 If the “Update HCU Calibration” results in ERROR / WARNING ............................................ 18
3.2.2 “Print Verification Image”......................................................................................................... 19
3.3 HCU Scale Calibration................................................................................................................ 19
3.4 Verification (curves, general shape) ........................................................................................... 20
3.5 Checklist for DICOM print ........................................................................................................... 21
3.6 Upgrading from 1.4.x (restore handling)..................................................................................... 21
3.7 DICOM Print Calibration overview .............................................................................................. 22
3.8 “Nice to know commands” for the HCU Calibration Tool............................................................ 23

4 DICOM Print Notes.................................................................................................................... 24


4.1 TIC Tool notes ............................................................................................................................ 24
4.2 DICOM Printer error Codes ........................................................................................................ 25
4.3 General image flow ..................................................................................................................... 26

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-1


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

1 INTRODUCTION

DICOM Print is a software option of the DigitalDiagnost system Release 1.4.1 or higher. This section is focused
on the DICOM Print option for release 1.5.x.

1.1 MANUAL HISTORY


Date Version Name Reason of changes
6.11.2006 1.0 Jörg Röhling Release 1.5.x

1.2 GETTING STARTED


First of all make sure to check the following:

1. Is the DICOM Print & Print Editor license present (CM) ?

2. Is the DICOM printer connected via the hospital Network ? Æ PING ?

3. Is the correct curve loaded in the DICOM printer (DICOM Curve) ?

4. Is the correct CURVE selected in DIDI? : DICOM Curve

5. Is the printer internally calibrated by the printer service ?

1.3 INSTALLATION (LICENSE KEY)


The package has to be activated via a license key. If delivered with a system the key is part of the license
CDROM. If delivered as a separate option, the key needs to be entered manually via the Customization
Manager (CM).

License?

7-2 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

2 CONFIGURATION FOR PRINTING:

2.1 BASIC EXAMINATION SET-UP FOR PRINTING

It is possible to select the scale (life = 100%, large = 86%, medium = 67%, small = 50%)
and film size (11" x 14", 14" x 17" etc.).

The Layout now includes the orientation of portrait or landscape (1x1P, 1x1L etc.).

AutoPrint per examination is configured with a separate toggle.

Figure 2-1, Examination Set-up for printing

2.2 HCU CONFIGURATION TOOL

2.2.1 HOW TO ENTER


Login as “service”:

User service

Password ************

OK Emergency Password Restart Shutdown

Service Tool Æ Configuration Æ HCU Configuration

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-3


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

Figure 2-2, HCU General Items

The HCU Configuration Tool offers a number of tabs to enter different configuration screens:

• Templates

Setting up templates for the printed film.

• Font Sets

Setting up fonts and font sizes for the different notations.

• String Groups

Define the different strings to be printed on the film taken from the DiDi database.

• Printers

Definition and configuration of the printer(s) to be activated for DICOM Print.

• General Items

See the above screen and the explanations of the next section.

7-4 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

2.2.2 “GENERAL ITEMS” TAB:

Print Mode : Within this setting, two configurations are possible:

Æ AutoPrint
Æ EasyPrint

1. AutoPrint

AutoPrint means that the system prints the film according to the
selected examination and the defaults within the configuration. This
function starts when an image is ‘‘confirmed’’ like today’s
DigitalDiagnost.
If the configured layout and scale can be accomplished within
the film then no other interaction is necessary, and the print job
will start in the background.
The ‘‘print preview’’ button (Verification Tool) allows the user to view
the current waiting pages.
The printed pages are removed. Changes to a page cancel any further
automatism for this page.

If AutoPrint is active & Illegal Scale Behavior is set to ‘‘ask what to


do’’, the print is NOT initiated fully automatically but stops to ‘‘ask for
what to do’’ only if the print cannot be performed as configured.

2. EasyPrint
EasyPrint works in exactly the same way as Auto Print with the exception that the user is always provided with print
preview either by selecting ‘‘back to patient list’’ or ‘‘print by preview’’. If the user is satisfied with the preview, a click on
the ‘‘print’’ button will initiate film printing.

Illegal Scale Behavior


If the scale set in the configuration (life, large etc) cannot be applied to the configured layout/film size then the
configuration ‘‘Illegal Scale Behavior’’ is adopted.
General items
Fit To View Port the image is rescaled to fit to the View Port
Cut and centre the image is cut around the edges. No scale change.
Ask, what to do the scale of the image remains constant and the print preview will appear so the user
can make any necessary changes before printing.

Apply Same Scale only applies when configuration of ‘‘Illegal Scale Behavior’’ is set to fit to film and there
are multiple images on one film.

None Only the image that is too large for the viewport will be fitted
Fit all All Images will be fitted to their individual maximum scale
Fit to smallest All images will have the same scale.

Incomplete Page mode If the user activates ‘‘back to patient list’’ before all spaces on the page are filled, the
incomplete page mode will be adopted.

Ask, what to do The print preview will appear, so the user can make any necessary changes before
printing.
Print incomplete Sends the incomplete page for printing.
Change template Selects an appropriate template for the current number of images.

Draw Calipers Displays on the film (along all four sides) calipers of 1 cm intervals.
(calipers = ruler/scale indicators)

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-5


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

Invert Panning Reverses the direction in which the panning tool is orientated.

AutoPrint active Switches on those examinations configured for automatic print.


Each examination can be switched on/off independently.
This toggle acts a master and therefore needs to be switched on to allow any auto-
printing.

Retries Number of retries of the print job in the event of an error printing.

Default Print Scale The default print scale configuration affects only the manual composition of films (not
through auto or easy print). It determines the scale at which images are first placed
on the film before any modification that can be performed by the user.

Three configurations are possible:

0 Fit image to the film


100 Place image life size on the film
other (ie 60, 70) Place image at this certain scale.

Local AET Application Entity Title of the Digital Diagnost

Calibration interval (days) Times in days between the warning messages that a calibration is required for
the printer. (default: 90 days)
General items (cont’d)

7-6 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

2.2.3 “PRINTERS” TAB:

The “Printer” tab enables the configuration and modification of the printers.
A screen printer is within the list of configured printers. This enables testing / training without the need to print
films. After activation of printing to the screen printer, the image will appear on part of the screen to show the
result. To activate this screen printer and make it visible for use within the user interface, follow the protection
(lock icon) instructions described in the template tab.

The set-up screen lets you enter all relevant DICOM & NETWORK values for each activated DICOM
printer to communicate with DiDi.

Procedure:

1. Click on “Add” to open the screen on the right.


(The first printer in the list is the default printer the system will use)

2. Select the printer to added and configured. Click on:

3. Name Model & Manufacturer is automatically filled in when a printer is selected

4. Description: can be filled if required.

5. Protocol ID: Always “DICOM”. Do not change.

6. Prototype: Inserted automatically. Do not change.

7. AET: Application Entity Title of the printer.

8. Hostname of the printer.

9. IP Address: of the printer.

10. Port number: of the printer.

11. Last Calibration: Shows the date of the last calibration. YELLOW if status is : “Not Calibrated”
12. Media: Remove or hide all unavailable film formats, types and resolutions.
Using a high resolution media can cause in a long time to get the image printed. To make sure you use the
standard resolution media remove the high resolution media and the 12 bit media as well. There is no need to
use the high resolution except for mammo images.
• In the media list press the right mouse button to open the menu.
• Select the print media to be removed or hidden.

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-7


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

2.2.4 „STRING GROUPS” TAB:

The “String Groups” tab enables the configuration of new and the modification of default string
groups that appear on the film.
All default string groups appear on the film in English (before an image is added).
Translation can be performed locally within this tab.

By selecting a string group and clicking “Edit”, one can modify the elements ( add, remove, move etc.) within
the string. One can “Add” new strings or duplicate, rename and modify old ones also (for protection
instructions see template tab).
Once a string group is saved, it appears in the list of all available string groups within the Add TextBox
functionality for the user and can be placed on a film.

2.2.5 „FONT SETS“ TAB

The “Font Sets” tab controls the size and type of each font set as it appears on each film size.
The font size for each sting group is selected in the “String Groups” tab (i.e. medium, small etc.). This can be
then independently configured for each film size within this table. The family (i.e. Times New Roman) and style
(i.e. plain, bold) can also be selected.
An example of how it will appear on the film is given. Changing a font size (e.g. medium font from 8 to 10)
within a selected film size changes all strings that use that font size (medium) within the film size.

ADD

7-8 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

2.2.6 “TEMPLATES” TAB

The “Templates” tab enables the construction of new and the editing of existing templates.
Systems are delivered with factory defaults that are protected from deletion and are not editable (without
unprotect).
The system also automatically protects any linked template from being deleted and renamed.

There are several states of templates:

Grey text with lock

Template cannot be edited, deleted and renamed. They are factory defaults and can only be viewed.
To allow editing the protection must be removed (see below).

Black text with lock

Template can be edited but not deleted or renamed. The lock is present due to a linkage within the
database. To rename or delete this template, the link to the examination must first be deleted.

Black text

Template can be edited, deleted and renamed. This is no link in the database.

Text with “Hidden” sign

This Template is not visible within the user interface. This is activated/deactivated by selecting the hide/unhide
button on a template that can be edited. Typically used for test templates.

Text with “-rot”

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-9


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

Templates, which contain “-rot”, will automatically rotate all images that fit better in the opposite rotation (if they
do not fit in the configured manner).
The configuration of “Auto-rotation” can be found in the settings box via the “Edit” button.
2.2.6.1 Protect / Unprotect templates (from editing)

In order to change or delete a non-editable template them the following must be performed:

• Select the template by pressing “Ctrl”, “Alt” and “Shift”

• Simultaneously click on the “View” button. It changes to “Edit” .

If the lock icon remains, the template is linked to an examination. Renaming or deleting is not
possible.

• Select “Edit” and perform the necessary changes to the template.

• When finished, return the template to the protected state by again pressing “Ctrl”, “Alt” and
“Shift” , select “Edit”. This now changes back to “View” and the template is not editable
again.

This protection mechanism also applies to the Printer tab, String tab and Font Sets tab.

2.2.6.2 Restrict number of (visible) templates

With this switch activated, the number of visible templates that are presented to the user
(without the need for scrolling) can be entered.

2.2.6.3 Configuring new and editing existing templates

The same tool shown below is used by both methods.

When “Add” (new templates) or “Edit” (modify existing templates) is selected the following screen

appears:

7-10 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

text

Viewport 2

Viewport 1

Viewport 3

Figure 2-3, Add & Edit Templates

Select Page
ADD Textbox /
String

Edit
Close Template
Editor
Delete

2.2.6.4 ADD Viewport

Viewports are added via the “dividing” function:

ADD Divide
Viewport Viewport
vertically horizontally

ADD
Viewport Divide
horizontally Viewport
vertically

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-11


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

2.2.6.5 Resizing the Viewports manually

As the template editor is programmed to use as much of the available space on a printout as possible,
decreasing of a view ports height would automatically increase the height of the view port below in the same
column.

For re-sizing the Viewport use the resize icons from the toolbox :

7-12 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

2.2.6.6 Editing a Viewport’s Reference Number and Caliper Position

All view ports of a template have a unique reference number, which is shown in the view port’s preview.
This reference number defines the order that is used for the AutoPrint functionality.
All factory default templates have four calipers on (one on each side). Each caliper can be removed
independently of each other.

To change a reference number or position of calipers:

• Select the Viewport that has to be changed.

• Click the (Edit) button

A small dialog appears in which all available reference numbers are shown and active
calipers displayed.

Now the user can select the preferred number. The selected Viewport exchanges the
reference number with the Viewport that owned this number before. The user can
also activate / deactivate each caliper.

A click on the “Close” button closes the box.

2.2.6.7 Textboxes

Textboxes are automatically filled with text, which get their content from the database. Text
boxes can either belong to a page or a Viewport. They can be moved using the arrow buttons
(Small movements are achieved by holding down the Ctrl-key).

For positioning the textbox within a Viewport use the arrows from the toolbox:

Select all
textboxes

Alignment of
all textboxes

Move by
click
Re-Size
Move via
cursor

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-13


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

2.2.6.8 Add textbox to a template

• Select the element, which the contents belong to by clicking either on the Page or a view port.
• Press the “Add Textbox” button.
• Define the rectangle that forms the textbox:

Æ The first click in a page sets the top left point of the line.
Æ The second click sets the bottom right point and finishes the rectangle.
Æ A box appears containing the coordinates of the upper left corner can be manipulated as well as the
width or height of the textbox.
Æ The required StringGroup can be selected from the menu.
Æ Ok applies this entry to the template, cancel does not apply the string and closes the box.

2.2.6.9 Removing a textbox from the template

• To remove a textbox select the existing textbox by clicking on it and press the
“remove” button.

2.2.6.10 Edit a TextBox

• Position the cursor to activate the textbox

• Click the (Edit) button

• Modify the textbox according to the requirements:


- Position (x/y)
- Width / height
- Text alignment (hor./vert.)
- Add strings to the textbox

• Accept when completed

Select a string out


of the rolled-out list.

7-14 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

2.2.6.11 Edit a page

• Select ”page” .

• Click the (Edit) button .

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-15


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

3 HCU CALIBRATION (DICOM PRINT)

The HCU Calibration is a relevant procedure to guarantee good image quality and correct scaling. The
calibration consists of a Greylevel Calibration AND the Scale Calibration.

NOTE:

Make sure to have the DICOM CURVE selected in the connected printer !
Prints on NOT calibrated printers will use the default curve.

3.1 HOW TO START

The Print Editor & The Print Calibration Tool can only be entered by using the service tool.

3.2 HCU GREY LEVEL CALIBRATION


The default size of the printed images for calibration/verification is smaller as expected.
Use the “shift” button in addition to the “print” buttons to enlarge the images.

1
3

Calibration
Data Entry

4 7 6

1. Select “Grey Levels“ for the grey level calibration. (1)

2. Select the printer to be calibrated (2)

3. Select the smallest film format. The calibration is valid for ALL formats ! (3)

4. Click on Produce Uncalibrated Image. (4) This will print the un-calibrated image on the selected printer.

(Shift + Produce Uncalibrated Image Æ Prints the Calibration Image in large size.)

5. Measure in the homogeneity area (H=horizontal bar / V= vertical bar) 5 points for each direction.

6. Measure with a densitometer the marked fields


(1 Æ 16) on the printed Un-Calibrated Image. You may enter the values into the table below.
7-16 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821
(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

7. Enter the measured values into the Calibration Data Entry Table. Use the slider or type in directly. (5)

8. Click on Update HCU Calibration to store the calibration. (6).


The values are checked and verified. If they are within the limits they are stored. If they are out of range
another screen pop-up and shows a “WARNING-PINK” or an “ERROR-RED”.
In case of a WARNING, again click on Update HCU Calibration. (Check IQ intensively in this case)

9. If successful. Click on Print Verification Image (7)

10. Measure the 16 values from the “Verification Image”. You may enter the values into the table below.

Figure 3-1, Uncalibrated Image Figure 3-2, Verification Image

NOTE
The measured density values are in a range of about 0.10 and 3.00 (i.e. 10 and 300).
A measured value of 0.10 is filled in as 10. A measured value of 3.00 is filled in as 300.

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-17


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

The verification image is used to check / validate the calibration to be correct / within the curve ranges.
Enter the values into the validation screen:

If the entered values are within range they are marked


GREEN. If ALL values are green the calibration was
successful.

If one or more values are marked “PINK”, there is a


WARNING. This could be acceptable. Please check
the IQ of the print by using the TIC tool.

If one or more values are marked “RED”, there is an


ERROR. This is not acceptable!

Click on “Back” to return to the HCU calibration screen.

Figure 6-3, Calibration Validation

In case of an ERROR:

- Check the film “date of expiry” !


- Check manufacturers printer set-up and calibration!
- Printer self test OK?
- Printer warmed-up?
- Is the densitometer calibrated and functional?
- Any typing errors/mistakes?
- Any incorrect measurements?

Î Repeat the calibration.

3.2.1 IF THE “UPDATE HCU CALIBRATION” RESULTS IN ERROR / WARNING


If the entered values measured in the calibration image are NOT within range, the following screens are shown:

Figure 3-3, Warning/ERROR after Update HCU Calibration


If an ERROR occurs the calibration needs to be repeated.
A WARNING could be acceptable. Check all values for typing and measurement errors/mistakes.

Check the print IQ by using the TIC tool !

7-18 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

3.2.2 “PRINT VERIFICATION IMAGE”


The verification image is used to check/validate the calibration to be correct/within the curve ranges.
Measure the printed verification image and enter the values into the validation screen.

Use “Return” or “Enter” for each input in that table!

If the entered values are within range they are


marked GREEN.
If ALL values are green the calibration is
successful and valid.

WARNING:
If one or more values are marked PINK, this
could be acceptable. Please check the IQ of
the printout by using the TIC tool.

ERROR:
If one or more values are marked RED:
This is not acceptable.

Repeat the calibration!

Figure 3-4, Calibration Validation

3.3 HCU SCALE CALIBRATION

3 6 5

1. Select “Scale“ for the Scale Calibration.

2. Select the printer (Print Device) to be calibrated (1)

3. Select a middle-sized film format. The once made calibration is valid for ALL film formats! (2)

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-19


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

4. Click on Produce Uncalibrated Image. (3) This will print the scale calibration image on the selected printer.

Image WIDTH (mm)

Image HEIGHT
(mm)

Figure 3-5, Scale Calibration Image

5. Measure the image WIDTH and HEIGHT of the white frame (outer borders).

6. Enter the measured mm-values into the measurement fields (4)

7. Click on Update HCU Calibration (5)

8. Click on Print Verification Image (6)

9. Measure and verify the values. If they are within the tolerances Æ proceed.
If not, re-do the scale calibration.

3.4 VERIFICATION (CURVES, GENERAL SHAPE)


The shape of the curves is a general view. They have no relation to any real measured values.

Curve 1:
un-calibrated (default slider position)

Curve 2:
calibration/correction
(calibration image)

Curve 3:
result curve (linear) sent to the printer
(verification image)

7-20 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

3.5 CHECKLIST FOR DICOM PRINT


1. Is the correct CURVE loaded / selected in the DICOM printer: DICOM Curve (ÆPrinter)?
2. Is the DICOM printer selected correctly in the HCU configuration (ÆDICOM Print tool)?
3. Is the DICOM printer set-up (IP, AET etc..) made correctly in the HCU configuration (ÆDICOM Print tool) ?
4. Is the DICOM printer connected correctly via the network? Can you ping the printer IP?
5. Is the DICOM printer Calibration correctly performed (ÆDICOM Print tool) ?
6. Are all values within the ranges? (Æ Verification/Validation performed?)
7. Did you RESTART the system after set-up?
8. Is the FINAL BACKUP performed?

NOTE

Special situation:
Upgrading a 1.4.1 system which formerly uses a not calibrated DICOM Printer and where the post-
processing’s have been adapted to the IQ of a not calibrated DICOM Printer.
When upgraded and calibrated, the images might appear different to the images from 1.4.1.
The post processing’s need to be re-adjusted!
There is another possible solution (but it is not recommended):
Use the printer with the default curve (no printer calibration!).

3.6 UPGRADING FROM 1.4.X (RESTORE HANDLING)

If an existing system is upgraded to 1.5.x keep in mind the following information:

1.4.0 Æ 1.4.1 Never restore “APC”


1.4.1 Æ 1.4.2 Æ 1.4.3 APC can be restored
1.4.0 Æ 1.5.x Never restore APC
1.4.2/3 Æ 1.5.x APC can be restored

If APC (1.4.0) was restored erroneously, the Print editor / Calibration Tool crashes.
The application needs to be re-installed to cure the problem.

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-21


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

3.7 DICOM PRINT CALIBRATION OVERVIEW

Figure 3-6, Calibration Overview

7-22 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

3.8 “NICE TO KNOW COMMANDS” FOR THE HCU CALIBRATION TOOL

Printing the calibration/verification image:

Ctrl + Produce Uncalibrated Image Æ Prints the circle wedge image + 16 field cal. image
Ctrl + Print Verification Image Æ Prints the circle wedge image + 16 field veri. image
Shift + Print Verification Image Æ Prints the Verification Image in large size
Shift + Produce Uncalibrated Image Æ Prints the Calibration Image in large size
Ctrl + Shift Produce Uncalibrated Image Æ Prints the circle wedge image in large size + 16 field cal. image
Ctrl + Shift Print Verification Image Æ Prints the circle wedge image in large size + 16 field veri.
Image

(NOTE: Strg = Ctrl)

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-23


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

4 DICOM PRINT NOTES

4.1 TIC TOOL NOTES


The TIC tool could be used to check the final image quality, to calibrate the DICOM Export Filter.
Details can be found in the TIC Tool UNIT Manual and the DICOM UNIT Manual.

The main and most important image to check the print IQ is the “circle wedge” image:

On the film this image should not show any


steps/borders from inner to outer areas. The
behavior must be strictly homogeneous.

If steps can be seen, the “clipping effect” is


identified. If this happens the clinical image would
loose grey areas and may hide structures, which
are present in the real image.

NOTE
The test images are always sent as linear (non physiologic) images. They are not adapted to the human eye.
The images may look darker than those from other modalities and also darker than our own patient images.
The appearance of the DIDI TIC Tool test images (1.4.2/3) is not comparable with the PCR NUEVO test
images.
BUT:
The clipping effect can be identified easily.
Clipping = non-homogeneous grey characteristic (visible steps).

7-24 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

4.2 DICOM PRINTER ERROR CODES

Error code display

Printer queue

Error Code / Message Application oriented Comment Value


HC_OK Printer Ready Everything OK 0x0000
UNKNOWN_ERROR Unknown error Unknown error 0x0001
REPOSITORY_ERROR System error Failure accessing objects in the source repository 0x0004
DATA_OBJECT_ERROR System error Selected DataObject is not found or locked. Thus an invalid 0x0005
or no longer existing ROID input parameter results in a job
failure
CONFIGURATION _ERROR System configuration The job can not be executed because configuration items 0x0006
error are missing or incorrect
NO_MEDIUM No Media no media on stock 0x0007
JOB _ERROR Job error The job contains invalid or incomplete parameters 0x0008
DICOM print related technical status Application oriented Comment Value
CONNECT_ERROR Unable to connect to the The establishment of the connection fails due to network 0x1000
printer problems or DICOM association problems
PROTOCOL_ERROR Printing protocol error Something wrong on DICOM protocol level 0x1001
Print specific technical status Application oriented Comment Comment
HC_PRINTER_NOT_FOUND Printer Not Found No connection with printer 0x2000
HC_NO_RCV_MAG Receiver Magazine Error Something wrong with the receiver magazine, e.g. full 0x2001
HC_MEDIA_JAM Media Jam Something wrong with transportation of medium 0x2002
HC_MEDIA_LOW Media Low The number of media on stock reached a threshold value 0x2003
HC_NO_SUPPLY_MAG No Media The supply magazine is not available 0x2004
HC_DOOR_OPEN Attention Required The printer is not closed 0x2005
HC_ATTENTION_REQUIRED Attention Required User should inspect the printer 0x2006
HC_HARDWARE_ERROR Printer Error Hardware error 0x2007
HC_PROC_NO_CHEM Attention Required no chemicals for development available 0x2008
HC_PROC_CHEM_LO Attention Required Availability of chemicals reached threshold value 0x2009
HC_TIMED_OUT Printer Error Waiting for reply took to long 0x200A
HC_MEDIA_MISMATCH Printer Error The requested medium is not on stock 0x200B
HC_NO_MEM Printer Error Not enough memory available in printer 0x200C
HC_RCV_MAG_FULL Attention Required The receiver magazine is full 0x200D
HC_PROCESSOR_ERROR Printer Error The processor of the printer detects an error 0x200E
HC_INVALID_COMMAND Printer Error The printer can not execute the required command 0x200F
HC_INVALID_PIXEL_DEPTH Printer Error The pixel depth is not valid 0x2010
HC_ILLEGAL_COPY_COUNT Printer Error The requested number of copies is not supported 0x2011

4512 983 11821 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-25


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

4.3 GENERAL IMAGE FLOW

Figure 4-1, General Image Flow

7-26 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11821


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES ...............................................MODULE CODE NUMBER: 4512 983 11831

7-1 ... 7-16 (06.0)

PCR Reader Integration DigitalDiagnost Release 1.5.x

Contents
1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 2

2 General remarks ......................................................................................................................... 2

3 Current Reader Software ........................................................................................................... 2


3.1 Eleva S+ Software ........................................................................................................................ 2
3.2 COMPANO-Reader software........................................................................................................ 2

4 General Access to relevant tools .............................................................................................. 3

5 Connecting the ELEVA S+ Reader to the DigitalDiagnost ..................................................... 5


5.1 ELEVA S+ Reader ........................................................................................................................ 5
5.1.1 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 5
5.1.2 Set up IP addresses.................................................................................................................. 5
5.1.3 Install the S+ software from the DigitalDiagnost hard disk. ...................................................... 5
5.1.4 S+ Reader calibration................................................................................................................ 6

6 Connecting the Compano Reader to DigitalDiagnost............................................................. 6


6.1 Set-Up the IP addresses............................................................................................................... 6
6.2 Upgrade the COMPANO Reader Software via DigitalDiagnost ................................................... 7
6.2.1 View the current COMPANO software version ......................................................................... 8
6.2.2 Install COMPANO software from the DigitalDiagnost hard disk. .............................................. 8

7 Compano / S+ Reader Calibration............................................................................................. 9


7.1.1 Calibration check....................................................................................................................... 9
7.1.2 Scanner calibration ................................................................................................................. 11

4512 983 11831 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-1


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

1 INTRODUCTION

Since Diagnost Release 1.4 an optional Compano CR Reader is supported.


Since Release 1.5 the PCR Eleva S+ Reader is supported (optional).
In addition to the workflow using the digital detector it is now possible to integrate images from the directly
connected PCR Reader into the image pool.
The patient list can show images from the DiDi detector AND the PCR plates. The plates are mapped to the
patient, which is currently active for an examination via FREE CASSETTE.

2 GENERAL REMARKS

For more details concerning the functionality please refer to the users manuals. This document will describe
the installation/set-up and calibration of the PCR Reader.
A reliable functionality can only be expected when the workflow described in the user manual is followed
strictly.

3 CURRENT READER SOFTWARE

3.1 ELEVA S+ SOFTWARE

With DiDi Release 1.5 the integrated reader software is 1.3. During the set-up process this software is
installed on the Reader. Several file structures are established on the DIDI system, based on the IP address
of the Reader.

3.2 COMPANO-READER SOFTWARE

With DiDi Release 1.4 / 1.4.1 the integrated PCR SW is A09.


With DIDI Release 1.4.2 the integrated PCR SW is A10.

Never try to install any FUJI CDROM to DiDi/Compano—it will not work.

If a new SW for the Compano Reader is required from the DIDI side, a separate DIDI Installation CDROM is
delivered. The standard way is a new DIDI Application SW package, which installs the required Compano SW
image on the DIDI hard disk.

7-2 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11831


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

4 GENERAL ACCESS TO RELEVANT TOOLS

Enter the DigitalDiagnost Service Tool:

Enter the PCR Reader MUTL Tool (ONLY COMPANO !!):

Only possible if both systems are correctly configured to establish a TELNET session via the network !

4512 983 11831 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-3


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

PCR MUTL

Set-up Reader IP address & License (COMPANO & S+)

From the Status Bar :

• System Æ Stop Æ Logout ÆInstall (& password)


• In the CM Manager select the page: PCR
• Check the License for “PCR Reader Integration” is to present !

P
License C
R
IP

7-4 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11831


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

5 CONNECTING THE ELEVA S+ READER TO THE DIGITALDIAGNOST

5.1 ELEVA S+ READER


The Eleva S+ PCR Reader is the successor of the Compano Reader. The Compano Reader is still supported.
New DIDI deliveries with integrated CR (option) will be equipped with the Eleva S+ Reader.

5.1.1 Installation

The mechanical & electrical installation has to be performed according to the SMI and the Release Bulletin of
the S+ reader.
Any further maintenance or service actions are to be performed via the service PC using the delivered FUJI
cdrom. This (communication-) software needs to be installed on the service laptop.
For more details also refer to the PCR ELEVA S+ Release Bulletin.

5.1.2 Set up IP addresses

1. Set up S+ Readers network data at the readers touch panel:

¾ Local IP (This is the S+ Reader IP)


¾ Netmask
¾ FTP Server IP (This is the DIDI IP)

2. Enter the local S+ IP into the DIDI system via the Customization Manager.

Restart the S+ Reader and the DIDI workstation.

5.1.3 Install the S+ software from the DigitalDiagnost hard disk.

This procedure is required to install relevant files on the DIDI and on the S+ system.

• Enter the DiDi Service Tool:

System Æ Logout Æ Login: service & password

• Service Tool:

Enter a command tool

• Start a telnet session to the S+ Reader IP address:

type in:

telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx <return> (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx = IP address of the S+ Reader)

• At the telnet promt type in:

Æ changeUpdateTime(3600) ....................................................... <return>


Æ install(“Install.lst”) ......................................................... <return>

Type in both apostrophe and brackets in the way shown: (“Install.lst”)

This will start the upload of the S+ Readers software including configuration.
The procedure will take about 15-30 minutes dependent on the type of workstation.

• The telnet session quits automatically when the procedure is finished.


• Make sure to restart the reader (power ON/OFF)

4512 983 11831 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-5


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

5.1.4 S+ Reader calibration

The S+ Reader calibration has to be performed according to the PCR Eleva S+ Release Bulletinn
There is no service software integrated into the DIDI system except for the required AQDS sets in the DIDI
Acceptance Tool. The Reader is usually pre-adjusted. No initial calibration is required.
According to local rules it might be required to perform acceptance tests.

These calibration procedures are to be performed by using the Service PC and the delivered FUJI service
tools (RU PC tool).

Refer to section 7.3 “Local service via Service PC” and “Compano / S+ Reader Calibration” (part of this
manual)

6 CONNECTING THE COMPANO READER TO DIGITALDIAGNOST


The Compano Reader is connected to the DigitalDiagnost workstation via a standard (Ethernet) network
connection, usually via the hospital network. If directly connected (for service) please use a cross-network
cable to do so.
Due to the fact that no separate PC is delivered with the Compano (if used with DiDi) , the service
communication is made via the Service Tool of the DigitalDiagnost workstation. A TELNET link is made and
the MUTL is started to communicate with the Compano.
Make sure the license for “PCR Reader Integration” is available and activated in the CM Manager.

6.1 SET-UP THE IP ADDRESSES

The Compano Reader is delivered with a default IP address 172.16.1.10


For the general communication set-up it is required to connect in the first step via this IP address to be able to
start the MUTL tool.

NOTE

In most cases it is a problem to connect to a hospital network by using “default” IPs. In addition it is expected
to have no connection due to non-matching net masks.
Therefore it is recommended to use a local network connection via a network-cross-cable to set-up the
basics.

Æ Set up DigitalDiagnost to have an initial connection :

• Enter the CM Manager


• Select the PCR frame
• Enter the default IP Address (172.16.1.10) of the Compano Reader
• Re-start the DigitalDiagnost workstation

7-6 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11831


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

Set-up the final IP address of the Compano by using the MUTL tool:

• Enter the PCR Reader MUTL tool (Service Tool):


This tools opens as a TELNET screen. No graphic user interface.

• From MUTL: Select 7: Software Utility Æ Temporary Settings to enter the final IP addresses in
the Compano..
0.QUIT
1. Enter 7 to select : 1.LOG
”SOFTWARE UTILITY” 2.VERSION
3.TEST
4.ELECTORICAL UTILITY
5.SCANNER UTILITY
6.MECHANICAL UTILITY
7.SOFTWARE UTILITY
8.BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE
9.HV OFF
>7 0.QUIT
1.DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
2.TEMPORARY SETTING
SU>2

2. Enter 2 to select TEMPORARY SETTING.

Now enter in sequence:

RU NAME Name of the Reader ( do not changeÆ <return> )


RU IP ADDR IP address of the Reader
CL IP ADDR IP address of the DiDi
FTP-SERV. IP address of the DiDi
INFO-HOST IP address of the DiDi
NETMASK Net mask
ROUTE IP address of the Router / Gateway
SEC.ADDR do not change Æ <return>

IP names and IP addresses must match the settings made at the Compano PC !!!

• Close the DiDi TELNET session (QuitÆButton: Disconnect )


• Switch ON/OFF the COMPANO
• Enter the CM manager of DiDi and type in the final IP address of the COMPANO
• Exit the CM manager ( Save & EXIT )

It should be possible now to enter the MUTL tool via the DigitalDiagnost Service Tool by using the new
settings.

6.2 UPGRADE THE COMPANO READER SOFTWARE VIA DIGITALDIAGNOST

STEP 1:
If a new COMPANO software needs to be installed it needs to be transferred to DiDi first !!
An installation from CDROM directly is not possible.
STEP 2:
The second step installs the software from that directory into the COMPANO.

4512 983 11831 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-7


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

6.2.1 View the current COMPANO software version

• Enter the DiDi Service Tool:


System Æ Service Æ (& password)
• Select “PCR Reader MUTL”. This will start a TELNET session .
• Follow the sequence below:

Æ mutl 0.QUIT
MAINTENANCE UTILITY FOR 1.DISPLAY VERSION
CR-IR346. 2.DETAIL
Escape INPUT/AUTO mode: VER>1
[CTRL+C] [ENTER]

0.QUIT CR-IR346RU Application Software :


1.LOG 114Y5436002A09
2.VERSION
3.TEST
4.ELECTORICAL UTILITY Software Resource Version
5.SCANNER UTILITY MAIN CPU IPL : Z45N5436001A02
6.MECHANICAL UTILITY
7.SOFTWARE UTILITY MAIN CPU APPL : Z45N5436002A09

6.2.2 Install COMPANO software from the DigitalDiagnost hard disk.

With Release 1.4.1 the A09 COMPANO software is already available on the DiDi hard disk !
(path: /export/home/cr-ir346/SYSTEM/COMMON )

• Enter the DiDi Service Tool:

System Æ Service Æ (& password)

• Select “PCR Reader MUTL”. This will start a TELNET session .


• Follow the sequence below:

-> mutl
MAINTENANCE UTILITY FOR CR-IR346.
Escape INPUT/AUTO mode: [CTRL+C]
[ENTER]

0.QUIT
1.LOG
2.VERSION
3.TEST 0.QUIT
4.ELECTORICAL UTILITY 1.DISPLAY VERSION
5.SCANNER UTILITY 2.DETAIL
6.MECHANICAL UTILITY
7.SOFTWARE UTILITY ver> 2 0.QUIT
8.BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE 1.LOAD SOFTWARE FROM FTP-SERV
9.HV OFF 2.LOAD CONFIGURATION FROM FTP-SERV
>2 3.COMPARE SOFTWARE WITH FTP-SERV
VER>DETAIL>1 0.QUIT
1.MAIN CPU IPL
2.MAIN CPU APPL
3.MAIN CPU FT
4.SUB CPU IPL
5.SUB CPU APPL
VER>DTL>LDSFT>

• It is required to install item 1 to 5 (one after the other) from that list.
• For more details concerning the PCR Reader mutl tool please refer to the COMPANO-S Release
Bulletin.
• Re-Start the COMPANO Reader

7-8 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11831


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

7 COMPANO / S+ READER CALIBRATION

7.1.1 Calibration check

Make sure to have cleaned the reader before starting any calibration or tests.
Make sure to have stored all scanner data.

• Enter the DiDi Service Tool:

System Æ Service Æ (& password)

• Select: Acceptance Æ Image QualityÆ PCR Calibration

1. From the examination work list select “Calibration”.


2. Link the PCR cassette
3. Start the Examination (PCR80KV)
4. Uniformly expose a 35x35 cm or 35x43 cm (14x14", 14x17") plate with a dosage of about 1mR (8.7 μGy)
and about 80kV. Use a large SID (min.1.8m). Don't use any filters. Open the shutters of the collimator
completely. Green label of the cassette points to the anode of the tube. Check the dosage with a
dosimeter. Perform the measurement with the dose meter before. The probe must not be shown in the
image !!!
NOTE: 0.6 – 2.0 mR must not be exceeded. (= 5.22 – 17.4 μGy)
5. Wait 10 minutes before entering the cassette into the reader.
6. “Confirm” the image

4512 983 11831 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-9


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

Results:

CENTER MEDIAN:

1. Click “Back to patient list”


2. View the PCR image
3. Magnify the centre if required
4. In the upper left corner of the center field the pixel value is printed.

According to the table below find the corresponding Pixel Value

Reference Value:
Dose Limits
Expected pixel value *
[mR] [μGy]
0,60 5.22 1821 1750-1890
0,70 6.09 1889 1830-1950
0,80 6.96 1949 1890-2000
0,90 7.83 2001 1950-2050
1,00 8.70 2048 2000-2090
1,10 9.57 2090 2050-2130
1,20 10.44 2129 2090-2160
1,30 11.31 2165 2130-2190
1,40 12.18 2198 2160-2230
1,50 13.05 2228 2190-2250
1,60 13.92 2257 2220-2280
1,70 14.79 2284 2250-2300
1,80 15.66 2309 2280-2330
1,90 16.53 2333 2300-2350
2,00 17.40 2356 2330-2370
(*) Pixelvalue log( Dose[mR])+ 2 ) * 1024

Horizontal Shading:
A
Shown are the delta values for: C-B / D-C
Tolerance: +/- 25

Vertical Shading Shading: B C D


Shown are the delta values for: C-A / E-C
Tolerance: +/- 50
E

NOTE

The Vertical Shading is influenced by the anode shadow and will not be corrected by the scanner calibration.

If the measured values are not within the limits, the calibration has to be repeated.

7-10 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11831


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

7.1.2 Scanner calibration

7.1.2.1 S+ Reader

Connect the service PC to via a network switch between DIDI and the S+ Reader. In most cases the Reader
should be disconnected from the hospitals network to avoid interferences (IP conflicts) or unknown IPs /
MACs.

Using the MUTL tool can perform the following adjustments/backups:

¾ Check Sensitivity values


¾ Sensitivity Calibration
¾ Save Scanner Data

7.1.2.1.1 Save/note down current Scanner Data

On the service PC enter the RU PC Tool and access the MUTL tool to access the Scanner data.

Figure 7-1, Scanner Data (Current Data)

4512 983 11831 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-11


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

7.1.2.2 Compano Reader

7.1.2.2.1 Save/note down current Scanner Data

• Enter the Service Tool

System Æ Service Æ (& password)

• Select “PCR Reader MUTL”. This will start a TELNET session .


• Follow the sequence below:

-> mutl
MAINTENANCE UTILITY FOR CR-IR346.
Escape INPUT/AUTO mode: [CTRL+C]
[ENTER]

0.QUIT 0.QUIT
1.LOG 1.INITIALIZE
2.VERSION 2.POLYGON
3.TEST 3.LASER
4.ELECTORICAL UTILITY 4.SAVE INITIAL LDIF
5.SCANNER UTILITY 5.HV STATUS
6.MECHANICAL UTILITY 6.HV ON/OFF
7.SOFTWARE UTILITY 7.HV DATA
8.BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE 8.FORMAT
9.HV OFF 9.SHADING / SENSITIVITY
>5 10.DATA MANAGEMENT
11.DIAGNOSTIC
12.VIRTUAL IMAGE 0.QUIT
SCN>10 1.SAVE SCN DATA FROM RAM TO FLASH&FTP-SERV
2.LOAD SCN DATA FROM FTP-SERV TO RAM&FLASH
3.DISPLAY SCN DATA ETC
SCN>DTM>3
0.QUIT
1.DISPLAY CURRENT DATA
2.DISPLAY CURRENT ERROR DATA
3.CONFIRM SAVED FILE LIST
SCN>DTM>DISP>1

MP :000149 / RCNT:000378 / NCNT :001211 / HVCNT:000509


PMTK:001724 / SAIP:000000 / SMD :000001 /
PIXO:000177 / FRQO:000002 / PIXS :-00028 / FRQS :000011
TMP :000152 / TML :000001 / HVDATA:000509 /
Xe :000010 / ERSMAX:000000
RESULT : OK

0.QUIT
1.DISPLAY CURRENT DATA
• Note (current) down the values for: 2.DISPLAY CURRENT ERROR DATA
3.CONFIRM SAVED FILE LIST
HVDATA:______________ SCN>DTM>DISP>0
HVCNT :______________

7-12 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11831


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

7.1.2.3 Re-calculate and measure the sensitivity -> mutl


MAINTENANCE UTILITY FOR CR-IR346.
Escape INPUT/AUTO mode: [CTRL+C]
0.QUIT
[ENTER]
1.INITIALIZE
2.POLYGON
0.QUIT
3.LASER
1.LOG
4.SAVE INITIAL LDIF
2.VERSION
5.HV STATUS
3.TEST
6.HV ON/OFF
4.ELECTORICAL UTILITY
7.HV DATA
5.SCANNER UTILITY
8.FORMAT
6.MECHANICAL UTILITY
9.SHADING / SENSITIVITY
7.SOFTWARE UTILITY
10.DATA MANAGEMENT
8.BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE
11.DIAGNOSTIC
9.HV OFF
12.VIRTUAL IMAGE 0.QUIT
SCN> 1.SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION >5
2.CALCULATION
3.SENSITIVITY DATA
4.HV DATA
5.PMT DATA
SCN>SS>1

0.QUIT
1. OFF
• Wait until the polygon calculation is finished…beep beep… 2. ON
0.QUIT
1.SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION
SCN>SS>col 2
2.CALCULATION
3.SENSITIVITY DATA
4.HV DATA
5.PMT DATA
SCN>SS>2
0.QUIT
1.SHADING,POLYGON CORRECTION AND
SENSITIVITY
2.SHADING AND POLYGON
3.POLYGON ONLY
4.SENSiTIVITY ONLY

SCN>SS>CAL 4
• Enter the measured dose (in mR) and press <ENTER>
to confirm
• Keep the MUTL window open for later use !!!
• Enter again the Image Quality Tool
Æ PCR Calibration / Homogeneity
Æ Select “Calibration” Æ Examination (PCR80KV) INPUT DOSAGE VALUE: (0.5-9.99
• Place the cassette with green label to anode ………
• Use the same parameters as in “Sensitivity” (PCR80KV).
• X-RAY the plate COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS
• Wait 10 minutes: Read OUT INTERRUPT: HIT (^C) + ENTER KEY
• It is not required to view the image.
The data has been calculated/stored by the reader automatically.
Wait until RESULT is OK. This is shown very shortly!!
• Quit the menus

4512 983 11831 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-13


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

7.1.2.4 Check the new values for HVDATA/HVCNT

-> mutl
MAINTENANCE UTILITY FOR CR-IR346.
Escape INPUT/AUTO mode: [CTRL+C]
[ENTER]

0.QUIT
1.LOG
2.VERSION
3.TEST
4.ELECTORICAL UTILITY
5.SCANNER UTILITY
6.MECHANICAL UTILITY
7.SOFTWARE UTILITY 0.QUIT
8.BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE 1.INITIALIZE
9.HV OFF 2.POLYGON
3.LASER
>5
4.SAVE INITIAL LDIF
5.HV STATUS
6.HV ON/OFF
7.HV DATA
8.FORMAT
9.SHADING / SENSITIVITY
10.DATA MANAGEMENT
11.DIAGNOSTIC
12.VIRTUAL IMAGE
SCN>10
0.QUIT
1.SAVE SCN DATA FROM RAM TO FLASH&FTP-SERV
2.LOAD SCN DATA FROM FTP-SERV TO RAM&FLASH
3.DISPLAY SCN DATA ETC
SCN>DTM> 3
0.QUIT
1.DISPLAY CURRENT DATA
2.DISPLAY CURRENT ERROR DATA
MP :000149 / RCNT:000378 / NCNT :001211 / HVCNT:000xxx 3.CONFIRM SAVED FILE LIST
PMTK:001724 / SAIP:000000 / SMD :000001 / SCN>DTM>DISP>1
PIXO:000177 / FRQO:000002 / PIXS :-00028 / FRQS :000011
TMP :000152 / TML :000001 / HVDATA:000yyy /
Xe :000010 / ERSMAX:000000
RESULT : OK

Note down the new values:

They should be in a range of about 500. If relevant differences are shown, Re-boot the reader and re-do the
measurements.

HVDATA:______________

HVCNT :______________

Check again the calibration. Refer to 0 “Calibration Check”.

7-14 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11831


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Options DigitalDiagnost systems

7.1.2.5 Save the reader/scanner data

-> mutl
MAINTENANCE UTILITY FOR CR-IR346.
Escape INPUT/AUTO mode: [CTRL+C]
[ENTER]

0.QUIT
1.LOG
2.VERSION
3.TEST
4.ELECTORICAL UTILITY
5.SCANNER UTILITY
0.QUIT
6.MECHANICAL UTILITY
1.INITIALIZE
7.SOFTWARE UTILITY
2.POLYGON
8.BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE
3.LASER
9.HV OFF
4.SAVE INITIAL LDIF
>5 5.HV STATUS
6.HV ON/OFF
7.HV DATA
8.FORMAT
9.SHADING / SENSITIVITY
10.DATA MANAGEMENT
11.DIAGNOSTIC
12.VIRTUAL IMAGE
SCN>10

0.QUIT
1.SAVE SCN DATA FROM RAM TO FLASH&FTP-SERV
2.LOAD SCN DATA FROM FTP-SERV TO RAM&FLASH
3.DISPLAY SCN DATA ETC
SCN>DTM>1

From the following menus select:

Æ 1. ALL
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE ALL SCANNER DATA ?

Æ 1. YES
The process may last 3 – 180 seconds . Do not interrupt until finished.
RESULT: OK should appear.

This saves the scanner data to the following directory on the DiDi system:

/export/home/cr-ir346/SYSTEM/ru0/MACHINE

4512 983 11831 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 7-15


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost systems Options

7.1.2.6 Save the scanner data from DiDi hard disk to CD-R

COMPANO Reader:

If required you may double save the data to an CD-R:

1. Copy the content of that directory to the TRANSFER directory

enter the Service Tool

open a commandtool

cd9 /export/home/cr-ir346/SYSTEM/ru0/MACHINE
cp9*9-r9 /export/home/SABRE/TRANSFER

2. Insert and mount the CD-R


3. Click on “TransferDirToOpticalDisk” . A “zipped” copy of the scanner data is stored to the CD-R.

S+ Reader

Use the MUTL tool from the RU PC Tool (PC).

7-16 CSIP Level 0 (06.0) 4512 983 11831


(c) 2006 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Release Bulletin 1.5 DigitalDiagnost Systems

LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES ...............................................MODULE CODE NUMBER: 4512 983 11801

7-1 ... 7-14 (06.1)

Release Bulletin 1.5

CONTENTS

1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 Manual history............................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Software CDROMs 1.5: ................................................................................................................ 2
1.3 What is new ? ............................................................................................................................... 2

2 Compatibility ............................................................................................................................... 3

3 Solved Problems......................................................................................................................... 4

4 Known Restrictions .................................................................................................................... 6

5 Software Installation (upgrade or re-installation).................................................................... 8


5.1 Installation..................................................................................................................................... 8
5.1.1 Open Boot Prom 4.17.1 ................................................................................................................ 8
5.1.2 Software Installation (Workstation) ............................................................................................... 9
5.1.3 Existing COMPANO READER: Install the A10 software...................................................................... 11
5.2 ELEVA S+ Reader ...................................................................................................................... 13
5.2.1 Installation................................................................................................................................... 13
5.2.2 Set up IP addresses ................................................................................................................... 13
5.2.3 Install the S+ software from the DigitalDiagnost hard disk. ........................................................ 13
5.3 Detector Calibration .................................................................................................................... 14
5.4 DICOM Print Calibration ............................................................................................................. 14

6 Nice to know.............................................................................................................................. 14

4512-983-11801 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 7-1


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost Systems Release Bulletin 1.5

1 INTRODUCTION
Factory systems are delivered with the installed Release including customization and basic set-ups.

Existing systems can be upgraded directly from 1.4.x to 1.5.x. Backups can be restored from 1.4.1 even when
created on another workstation (≠ hostID).

1.1 MANUAL HISTORY


Date Version Name Reason of changes
6.11.2006 1.0 Jörg Röhling NEW
13.11.2006 1.1 Jörg Röhling Update1

1.2 SOFTWARE CDROMS 1.5:


• Operating System (Solaris 8)
• Application SW 1.5.x
• Language CD 1.5.x
• OBP (Open Boot prom) update (4.17.1)
• Backup CD´s
• DigitalDiagnost Service Documentation CD

1.3 WHAT IS NEW ?

• Service Tool was partly new designed


• Automatic stitching
• Clinical QC / Reject Analysis tool (for customer)
• Anatomical Database is new. Handling is based on the FSF (Field Service Framework) structure
• Password GUI. Passwords and users can be added or changed. (Exception: root / service)
• User authentification. According to customizable user & password any access is traced/logged.
• Customization Manager re-designed
• USB stick support for file transfer (TRANSFER --> USB stick)
• No Modem support
• “Control-Alt-Delete” (for emergency System Re-Start)
• stop+a restricted (only while booting)
• DX / DR standard selectable
• Backup/Restore re-designed: B&R from/to MOD/CD/TRANSFER
• PCR Reader Integration does not use a barcode reader

Required hardware/firmware:

• FW Bucky 11.1 (incl. address decoder)


• Optimus Generator 4.1 (CDROM)
• FW Wallstand Controllers 2.0.3
• FW BUF Controller 2.2.1
• FW TOMO Motor Controller 2.5
• FW Control Handle 4.1

Options:

• PCR S+ Reader support (Compano replaced by S+ Reader for new deliveries)


• VM horizontal motorized supported (upgrade only when CS2/4 is prepared with tomo or motorized
prepared)
• DigitalDiagnost TH-M (Height Adjustable Trolley)
• Stitching Accessory (for Automatic Stitching)
• TH-S table with new TH-S Controller / CAN connected. (TH-S non CAN also supported)

7-2 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 4512-983-11801


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Release Bulletin 1.5 DigitalDiagnost Systems

2 COMPATIBILITY
ONLY Release 1.4.x systems can be directly upgraded to Release 1.5
Former Releases need to be upgraded first to Release 1.4.x

Backups:
Backups 1.3.x can be restored only on the same workstation.
Backups 1.4.x can be restored on another workstation with some restrictions.
Backups 1.5.x can be restored on another workstation.
U10 : Backup-Restore from CDROM possible

Open Boot Prom

Some SUN Blades workstation (red & silver) are delivered with an OBP (Open Boot Prom) version ≤ 4.17.1.
With release 1.5 an OBP Flash cdrom is delivered. The flash procedure needs to be performed before any new
application software is installed.
The new OBP version makes type7 keyboards and a number of memory types compatible.

Hardware requirements for 1.5 upgrade (workstation)

SUN Ultra 10:


¾ 1 GB memory & hard disk ≥ 9 GB required.
¾ Auto stitching cannot be installed.
¾ DICOM print is not recommended.

SUN Blade Red/Silver


¾ 2GB memory required.

TH-S Table with new TH-S controller

The TH-S table is delivered with the new TH-S controller board. In the 1.5 environments the table is CAN-
controlled. It than requires FW level 2.0.x

Existing systems with TH-S tables, which are not CAN controlled, can also be upgraded to 1.5. This THS
controller needs FW 1.0.x.

The controller is usually delivered with the correct FW for 1.5.


In case of a replacement the controller can be flashed via the service PC with the required FW.
The FLASHIT cdrom is delivered with every TH-S table & every TH-S controller.

VM horizontal motorized

Only possible with TH-S table !!

4512-983-11801 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 7-3


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost Systems Release Bulletin 1.5

3 SOLVED PROBLEMS

• DICOM Print IQ increased


A new calibration procedure increases the image quality. 16 fields are to be measured instead of
former 9 fields. + Validation & Verification. Like in 1.4.2/1.4.3.
• Verification Tool (resolution can be adjusted)

The resolution / IQ of the Verification Image is adjustable.


Increase of resolution --> delayed display.
Service Tools Æ Configuration Æ Unstructured Æ User Interface (UI) Æ
VeriImageSusampleFactor: 4 (default) / 2 (increased IQ Æ delayed display)

• DICOM Print performance (speed)


The printing performance was improved to about 1-2 minutes from “commit” Æ “printed film”. This
can only be reached under the following (ideal) pre-conditions:
- Ideal network (100 Mbit/sec).
- No heavy network load.
- No printing jobs from other modalities in the printer queue.
- Printer is active. No warm-up required.
- Normal image resolution. No high-resolution. Like in 1.4.2/1.4.3.

• Clean patient list & hidden queues

The change of the system language does not clean patient list & queues anymore.

Instead:
Change the “Device Serial Number” (temporary)
Re-Start
Change it back to original
Re-Start

• PCR Integration (several problems)

- No “burned” image plates


- No linking problem. The image in the Reader will be linked to the active patient & AQDS
- No BARCODE handling by DIDI PCR integration.
- No blocked CR plates
- A10 Reader SW is part of 1.5 (can be uploaded to the Compano Reader via DIDI)

• VeriTool crash
Finally solved.

• TIC Tool
Can now send images to PACS (via DICOM) without DICOM Print license.
SMPTE image available!

• BWLM Background Query crashes Image Processor


Solved.

• Strange Characters in Wall stand display


This problem is finally solved now. Since 1.4.3.

• Bad calibration (IQ) with communication error to detector (first image)


Solved.

7-4 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 4512-983-11801


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Release Bulletin 1.5 DigitalDiagnost Systems

• Examination performed under wrong Accession number


Solved.

• Inaccurate image ranging


Ranger re-designed to improve the quality.

• VIEW button with large patient list leads to hang-up


No restrictions when using VIEW within a large patient list.

• Small objects not handled correctly when sent to PACS (smaller/not centered)
Workflow improved.

• EI indication not printed on film with “auto print”


Solved.

• Send to PCR does not work when BWLM active


Solved.

• Bad Verification Image (spec. small objects)


IQ improved.

• Table-Detector collision during downwards movement (TH-S)


With new delivered systems the TH-S table is CAN controlled. Collisions are prevented at any time.

• Amplimat fields behavior


If the collimation is below the “collimation threshold” (X-Scope) the outer chambers will be
switched off and the inner chamber gets activated.

• Day Light Saving Time schedules change in 2007 +


US: Second Sunday in March and end the first Sunday in November. This is corrected in this
release.

• New Printer definition files


Released printer definition files are generally part of the released DIDI application software.
Printer prototype files cannot be updated separately by a prepared process. They need to be
inserted manually by using a command tool.
DICOM Printer Prototype Directory:
/export/home/SABRE/SYSTEM/APC/PROTOTYPES

Officially tested & released printer prototype files (.xml) can be copied manually to this directory.
This directory is part of the backup process.

4512-983-11801 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 7-5


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost Systems Release Bulletin 1.5

4 KNOWN RESTRICTIONS

• Backups from former releases cannot be restored (directly) to 1.5


The databases in Release 1.3.x/1.4.3 had an unknown bug, which corrupted some
DB pointers. This was no problem within 1.3.x/1.4.x . But is for 1.5. When restoring
to 1.5, the current 1.5 database may crash.

Workarround:
We need to receive the old (1.4.x) Backup from the upgrade site to check & repair it
in a way that it can be restored to 1.5. Some files might not be recovered. A report
of un-recovered database entries will be generated.

• Printer calibration has no film-format relation


If performed, it is valid for ALL valid film-formats.
• Scale / Grey Level Calibration:
When clicking on “Scale/Grey level” a second time after it has been active already, the user
interface could be mixed up. The help text toggles between “Grey level and Scale”.
• Cassette gets stuck in the PCR Reader
This rarely can happen still within 1.5.
• No “offline” configuration for Anatomical Database

• Tracking ON/OFF lets the tube move the other direction


When switching OFF tracking and measure manually - then switch ON Tracking again may let the
tube move the wrong way.

• Stitching Examination/Acquisitions lost.


When temporary deleting the Auto-Stitching license, the related Examinations/Acquisitions are
deleted. They can be restored via the backup.

• Move to position with motorized VM


MTP only works sufficient when the CS once is driven into a detent & the alpha drive has once
reached a 0° or 90° position.

• Send to PCR
Does not work with PCR ELEVA systems.

• TYPE 7 Keyboard & Blade 2500 SILVER is not compatible with Barcode Reader Option
When the Barcode Reader Option is installed the TYPE 7 USB keyboard is not fully compatible:
Workaround: System boot while Barcode Reader is disconnected. The Barcode Reader could be
connected/disconnected directly at the TYPE 7 keyboard. (Identify Type7 keyboards: They have a
separate USB port).

• TYPE 7 Keyboard
USB stick cannot be used at the keyboards USB ports. If done so, remove the USB stick and re-
start the system. Only use the USB ports at the backplane.

• PCR MUTL tool must not be minimized


When minimizing the PCR MUTL tool it stays alive behind other windows an cannot be re-activated.
This requires a system re-start.
• No remote access to Anatomical Database

7-6 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 4512-983-11801


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Release Bulletin 1.5 DigitalDiagnost Systems

• No remote access to printer configuration/calibration

• No remote access to Backup & Restore

• DICOM Print (Calibration)

The magnification function (shift-“Print”) does not work. The Calibration & Verification image can
only be printed in small size. This is sufficient for the calibration/verification.

• Auto Stitching
Ruler may cause memory/ghost structures when a number of images are taken.
To avoid this, it is required to wait a little longer to proceed with the next exposures.

• Finish language
De-installation of the finish language can be incomplete. A re-installation of the application package
OR the restore the database will cure it.

4512-983-11801 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 7-7


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost Systems Release Bulletin 1.5

5 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION (UPGRADE OR RE-INSTALLATION)


Release 1.5.x can be installed via prepared procedures of the DigitalDiagnost system. Follow the sequence
described below.
Factory systems are delivered with the installed Release including customization and basic set-ups.

5.1 INSTALLATION

5.1.1 Open Boot Prom 4.17.1

Open Boot Prom (OBP) Flash 4.17.1

This cdrom contains an OBP flash procedure to update SUN BLADES (red & silver)
to OBP version 4.17.1. (Only valid for DIDI Rel. 1.3.x/1.4.x).

The current OBP version is shown during workstation boot.


Use this cdrom when the OBP version is lower than 4.17.1. !!

Problems solved:
- Memory compatibility
- Type7 keyboards compatibility

Procedure:
This cdrom needs to be installed as an Extension Level.

1. Insert cdrom
2. Enter the Installation Manager
3. Select: "(8) Add Install Extension Level"

Within some minutes the OBP is flashed and the system is restarting.
During restart the OBP version is displayed. It is now 4.17.1

Note:
This Extension Level is not installed within the Application SW.
It performs the flash process and then disappears.
In case of a another software re-installation it is not required to re-flash !!

7-8 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 4512-983-11801


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Release Bulletin 1.5 DigitalDiagnost Systems

5.1.2 Software Installation (Workstation)

Perform a database BACKUP:

System Æ Logout Æ Login: service & password Æ Backup/Restore

User service

Password ************

OK Emergency Password Restart Shutdown

Exit the Service Tool & Logout the application software from the Status Bar & login as “install”

System Æ Logout Æ Login: install & password

User install

Password ************

OK Emergency Password Restart Shutdown

Proceed as shown in the overview below. The installation is mostly self-explaining.

4512-983-11801 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 7-9


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost Systems Release Bulletin 1.5

Figure 5-1, Software Installation 1.5.x

7-10 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 4512-983-11801


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Release Bulletin 1.5 DigitalDiagnost Systems

5.1.3 Existing COMPANO READER: Install the A10 software

The following description is only relevant if a COMPANO Reader is connected to the DigitalDiagnost
system.

The A10 Reader software is integrated 1.5.x .


If the connected Reader still runs the A09/A08 software it must be upgraded via the known upgrade process
from DigitalDiagnost.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

ONLY use the described sequence below to upgrade the Reader software.
The upgrade via the Installation Manager cannot be used !!!

5.1.3.1 View the current COMPANO software version

• Enter the DiDi Service Tool:

System Æ Logout Æ Login: install & password

• Service Tool: Select “PCR Reader MUTL”. This will start a TELNET session.

• Follow the sequence below:

Æ mutl 0.QUIT
MAINTENANCE UTILITY FOR 1.DISPLAY VERSION
CR-IR346. 2.DETAIL
Escape INPUT/AUTO mode: VER>1
[CTRL+C] [ENTER]

0.QUIT
CR-IR346RU Application Software :
1.LOG 114Y5436002A10
2.VERSION
3.TEST
4.ELECTORICAL UTILITY 1.1.1.1.1 Software Resource Version
5.SCANNER UTILITY MAIN CPU IPL : Z45N
6.MECHANICAL UTILITY
7.SOFTWARE UTILITY MAIN CPU APPL : Z45N5
8.BACKUP MEMORY SUB CPU IPL : Z45N
INITIALIZE SUB CPU APPL : Z45N
9.HV OFF
SCN CPU APPL : Z45N
>2

4512-983-11801 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 7-11


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost Systems Release Bulletin 1.5

5.1.3.2 Install the COMPANO software from the DigitalDiagnost hard disk.

• Enter the DiDi Service Tool:

System Æ Logout Æ Login: service & password

• Service Tool: Select “PCR Reader MUTL”. This will start a TELNET session.

• Follow the sequence below:

-> mutl
MAINTENANCE UTILITY FOR CR-IR346.
Escape INPUT/AUTO mode: [CTRL+C]
[ENTER]

0.QUIT
1.LOG
2.VERSION
3.TEST
4.ELECTORICAL UTILITY
5.SCANNER UTILITY
6.MECHANICAL UTILITY
7.SOFTWARE UTILITY
8.BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE
9.HV OFF
>2

0.QUIT
1.DISPLAY VERSION 0.QUIT
2.DETAIL 1.LOAD SOFTWARE FROM FTP-SERV
ver> 2 2.LOAD CONFIGURATION FROM FTP-SERV
3.COMPARE SOFTWARE WITH FTP-SERV
VER>DETAIL>1 0.QUIT
1.MAIN CPU IPL
2.MAIN CPU APPL
3.MAIN CPU FT
4.SUB CPU IPL
5.SUB CPU APPL
VER>DTL>LDSFT>

• It is required to install item 1 to 5 (one after the other) from that list.
• For more details concerning the PCR Reader mutl tool please refer to the Reader Release Bulletins.
• Quit the mutl tool
• Re-Start the PCR Reader !

7-12 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 4512-983-11801


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Release Bulletin 1.5 DigitalDiagnost Systems

5.2 ELEVA S+ READER


The Eleva S+ PCR Reader is the successor of the Compano Reader. The Compano Reader is still supported.
New deliveries with integrated CR (option) will be equipped with the Eleva S+.

5.2.1 Installation

The mechanical & electrical installation has to be performed according to the SMI and the Release Bulletin of the
S+ reader.
Any further maintenance or service actions are to be performed via the service PC using the delivered FUJI
cdrom. This (communication-) software needs to be installed on the service laptop.
For more details refer to the PCR ELEVA Release Bulletin.

5.2.2 Set up IP addresses

1. Set up S+ Readers network data:

¾ Local IP (Readers IP)


¾ Netmask
¾ FTP Server IP (DIDIs IP)

2. Enter the local S+ IP into the DIDI system via the Customization Manager.

Restart the S+ Reader and the DIDI workstation.

5.2.3 Install the S+ software from the DigitalDiagnost hard disk.


This procedure is required to install relevant files on the DIDI and on the S+ system.

• Enter the DiDi Service Tool:

System Æ Logout Æ Login: service & password

• Service Tool:

Enter a command tool

• Start a telnet session to the S+ Reader IP address:

telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx <return> ......... (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx = IP address of the S+ Reader)

• At the telnet promt type in:

Æ changeUpdateTime(3600) <return>
Æ install(“Install.lst”) <return>

This will start the upload of the S+ Readers software including configuration.
The procedure will take about 15-30 minutes dependent on the workstation.

• The telnet session quits automatically when the procedure is finished.


• Make sure to restart the reader (ON/OFF)

4512-983-11801 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 7-13


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DigitalDiagnost Systems Release Bulletin 1.5

5.3 DETECTOR CALIBRATION


Perform the Detector calibration as usual.

5.4 DICOM PRINT CALIBRATION


Make sure to re-calibrate the existing DICOM printer. Refer to the “UNIT manual DICOM Print.”
Release 1.5 uses the same DICOM print tool.

6 NICE TO KNOW
Emergency shutdown & re-start

Instead of using Stop & A it could be helpful to use:

STRG & ALT & DEL


Or
Ctrl & ALT & DEL

This key combination shuts-down & re-starts the system at any time.

Should be used ONLY in case of a hang-ups.

Stop + a is blocked during normal operation. Only while the system is booting (shortly after switch ON)
it can be used.

Master Recovery Point / Recovery Points

1. Recovery Points (RP)

Every time a Backup is re-stored a “Recovery Point” is created by the system automatically. It reverts to
it when the re-store could not be completed successfully. The system can create up to 5 Recovery
Points. When the fifth RP is reached, the user is forced to set a Master Recovery Point.

2. Master Recovery Point (MRP):

From the Backup/Restore menu it is possible to set a Master Recovery Point manually.
Only ONE MRP is possible when ever necessary the user can revert to that MRP.

Emergency menu (Software crash).

When the system software may not start-up or crashes, it re-boots automatically up to five times.

If this is not successful a menu is shown to give you three choices to proceed:

1. Login as service:
This opens the remote service menu and gives some additional changes to solve the problem or to save
several log-files.

2. Revert to the last “Master Recovery Point”


This re-starts the system at the configuration state of the last valid Master Recovery Point

3. Shutdown & Switch Off


This is usually the customer’s action at that status of the system. In this case the local service needs to
be called.

Clear Calibration

Requires a second re-start of the system software.


„

7-14 CSIP Level 0 (06.1) 4512-983-11801


(c) 2006 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

You might also like